JVC KENWOOD 31201110 HF/VHF/UHF All-mode Multi-band Transceiver User Manual 0 Front page

JVC KENWOOD Corporation HF/VHF/UHF All-mode Multi-band Transceiver 0 Front page

UserManual.wiki >

JVC KENWOOD >

31201110 User Manual HTML Version

Users Manual

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

ALL MODE MULTI-BAND TRANSCEIVER

TS-2000

TS-2000X

TS-B2000

KENWOOD CORPORATION

yrosseccA rebmuNtraP ytitnauQ

0002-ST X0002-ST 0002B-ST

enohporciMXX-2530-19T11

elbacrewopCDXX-7513-03E11

gulpNIDnip-7XX-1570-70E11

gulpNIDnip-8XX-1580-70E11

gulpNIDnip-31XX-1531-70E11

)A52(esuFXX-1352-50F11

)A4(esuFXX-7204-60F11

teSwercSXX-4202-99N11

034-BMrofrecapSXX-8962-11G44

retlifeniL

XX-8041-97L11

dnaBgniniateR

XX-7030-16J11

MOR-DCXX-3210-39T–1

launaMnoitcurtsnIXX-2121-26B11

kcolB/citamehcS smargaiD

XX-4160-25B XX-6160-25B XX-7160-25B 11

dracytnarraW

XX-9640-64B )epyt-K( XX-0130-64B )sepyt-EllA(

THANK YOU

Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS-2000(X)/

TS-B2000 transceiver. It has been developed by a

team of engineers determined to continue the

tradition of excellence and innovation in KENWOOD

transceivers.

This transceiver features dual Digital Signal

Processing (DSP) units to process IF and AF signals.

By taking maximum advantage of DSP technology,

the TS-2000(X) gives you enhanced interference

reduction capabilities and improves the quality of

audio that you transmit without installing additional

analog filters. You will notice the differences when

you fight QRM and QRN. As you learn how to use

this transceiver, you will also find that KENWOOD is

pursuing “user friendliness”. For example, each time

you change the Menu No. in Menu mode, you will see

scrolling messages on the display that tell you what

you are selecting.

Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically

sophisticated and some features may be new to you.

Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from

the designers. Allow the manual to guide you through

the learning process now, then act as a reference in

the coming years.

FEATURES

• All mode operation from HF to 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/

TS-B2000 Optional) amateur radio band with DSP

functions.

• Dual high speed Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

units.

• Adjustable DSP filter frequencies.

• High speed Digital Automatic Gain Control (AGC).

• A second independent sub-receiver for the 144 MHz

and 430 (440) MHz bands (FM and AM mode only).

• A built-in Antenna Tuner for HF/ 50 MHz band.

• A built-in 9600/ 1200 bps TNC for packet operation.

• DX PacketCluster Tune (P.C.T.) for DX hunting.

• Instant Satelite communication key.

• A razor sharp DSP filter up to 50 Hz for CW

operation.

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the

items listed in the table. We recommend you keep

the box and packing material below in case you need

to repack the transceiver in the future.

1 E and E2-type only

WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED

The writing conventions described below have been

followed to simplify instructions and avoid

unnecessary repetition.

noitcurtsnI oDottahW

sserP ]YEK[ .esaelerdnasserP YEK .

sserP ]1YEK[ ,]2YEK[ .sserP 1YEK ,yliratnemom

esaeler 1YEK sserpneht,

2YEK .

sserP ]2YEK[+]1YEK[ .dlohdnasserP 1YEK neht,

sserp 2YEK eromeraerehtfI. dlohdnasserp,syekowtnaht lanifehtlitnunrutniyekhcae .desserpneebsahyek

sserP +]YEK[NOREWOP .rewopreviecsnartehthtiW dlohdnasserp,FFO YEK ,reviecsnartehtNOnrutneht gnisserpybrewop ]REWOP[ .

INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER

REQUIRED BY THE FCC

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that the

interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct

the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

•

Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

•

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

•

Consult the dealer for technical assistance.

FCC WARNING

This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy.

Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful

interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in

the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to

operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or

modification is made.

NOTICE TO THE USER

One or more of the following statements may be

applicable for this equipment.

MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL

The models listed below are covered by this manual.

TS-2000 : HF/ VHF/ UHF All-mode Multi-band

Transceiver

TS-2000X : HF/ VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz All-mode

Multi-band Transceiver

TS-B2000 : HF/ VHF/ UHF All-mode Multi-band

Transceiver

As for TS-B2000, refer to the on-line help how to

operate and control the transceiver. Refer to pages

2, 3, and XX for the installation and informations on

the connectors.

MARKET CODES

K-type : The Americas

E-type : Europe

E2-type : Spain

Refer to the Appendix {page XX} for theinformation

on available operating frequencies.

iii

Please observe the following precautions to prevent

fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage:

• Connect the transceiver only to a power source

described in this manual or as marked on the

transceiver itself.

• Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power

cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched

by items placed near or against the cables. Pay

particular attention to locations near AC

receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to

the transceiver.

• Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the

transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal

objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into

the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in

serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to

insert any objects into the transceiver.

• Do not attempt to defeat methods used for

grounding and electrical polarization in the

transceiver, particularly involving the power input

cable.

• Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this

transceiver using approved methods. Grounding

helps protect against voltage surges caused by

lightning. It also reduces the chance of a build-up

of static charge.

• Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor

antenna from power lines is one and one-half

times the vertical height of the associated antenna

support structure. This distance allows adequate

clearance from the power lines if the support

structure fails for any reason.

• Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with

its ventilation. Do not place books or other

equipment on the transceiver that may impede the

free movement of air. Allow a minimum of

4 inches (10 cm) between the rear of the

transceiver and the wall or operating desk shelf.

• Do not use the transceiver near water or sources

of moisture. For example, avoid use near a

bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a damp

basement or attic.

• The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is

often a sign of trouble. Immediately turn the

power OFF and remove the power cable. Contact

a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for

advice.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

GROUND

CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

GROUNDING

CONDUCTORS

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE

GROUNDING ELECTRODE

SYSTEM

• Locate the transceiver away from heat sources

such as a radiator, stove, amplifier or other

devices that produce substantial amounts of heat.

• Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint

thinner, gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet

of the transceiver. Use a clean cloth with warm

water or a mild detergent.

• Disconnect the input power cable from the power

source when the transceiver is not used for long

periods of time.

• Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do

accessory installations described in this manual or

accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions

carefully, to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar

with this type of work, seek assistance from an

experienced individual, or have a professional

technician do the task.

• Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the

following cases:

a) The power supply or plug is damaged.

b) Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the

transceiver.

c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain.

d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or

performance has seriously degraded.

e) The transceiver has been dropped or the

enclosure damaged.

PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS I

CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION

ANTENNA CONNECTION ....................................... 1

GROUND CONNECTION ........................................ 2

LIGHTNING PROTECTION ..................................... 2

DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION...................... 2

UTILIZING THE BAIL............................................... 2

REPLACING FUSES ............................................... 2

ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS ............................... 3

FRONT PANEL .................................................... 3

Headphones (PHONES) ................................. 3

Microphone (MIC) ........................................... 3

REAR PANEL ...................................................... 3

External Speakers (EXT. SP1/ EXT. SP2) .......3

Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY) ................... 3

CHAPTER 2 YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50MHZ)

RECEIVING............................................................. 4

TRANSMITTING...................................................... 5

CHAPTER 3 YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF)

RECEIVING............................................................. 6

TRANSMITTING...................................................... 7

CHAPTER 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

FRONT PANEL ........................................................ 8

REAR PANEL ........................................................ 13

DISPLAY ............................................................... 14

MICROPHONE ...................................................... 17

CHAPTER 5 OPERATING BASICS

SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF ............................. 18

ADJUSTING VOLUME .......................................... 18

AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN....................... 18

RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN ...................... 18

SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B ............................. 18

SELECTING A BAND ............................................ 18

SELECTING A MODE ............................................ 19

ADJUSTING SQUELCH ........................................ 19

SELECTING A FREQUENCY ................................ 19

FRONT PANEL METER......................................... 19

TRANSMITTING.................................................... 20

SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER ..................... 20

MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 20

CHAPTER 6 MENU SETUP

WHAT IS A MENU?................................................ 21

MENU A/ MENU B ................................................. 21

MENU ACCESS .................................................... 21

QUICK MENU........................................................ 21

PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU ............... 21

USING THE QUICK MENU ............................... 21

MENU CONFIGURATION ..................................... 22

CONTENTS

ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST......................... 26

CHAPTER 7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS

SSB TRANSMISSION ........................................... 28

FM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 28

TX DEVIATION SELECTION ............................. 29

AM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 29

CW TRANSMISSION ............................................ 30

AUTO ZERO-BEAT ........................................... 30

TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY ......... 30

CHAPTER 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION ........................ 31

TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET) .......... 31

FM REPEATER OPERATION ................................ 32

PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET .......................... 32

Selecting Offset Direction .............................. 32

Selecting an Offset Frequency ...................... 32

TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 33

Activating Tone Function ............................... 33

Selecting a Tone Frequency .......................... 33

Selecting Continuous or Burst ....................... 33

Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone ........................ 33

AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET ................... 34

REVERSE FUNCTION ...................................... 34

AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) .............. 34

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN ..................................... 35

FM CTCSS OPERATION....................................... 35

CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN ................................... 35

FM DCS OPERATION............................................. 36

DCS CODE ID SCAN ........................................ 36

CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

RECEIVING ........................................................... 37

SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY .................... 37

Direct Frequency Entry ................................. 37

Using 1 MHz Steps ....................................... 37

Quick QSY.................................................... 37

Fine Tuning ................................................... 37

Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) .............. 38

RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING) .......... 38

AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) ............... 38

TRANSMITTING .................................................... 39

VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT) ............. 39

Microphone Input Level ................................. 39

Delay Time ................................................... 39

SPEECH PROCESSOR .................................... 40

XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) ....... 40

CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL

CHARACTERISTICS ......................................... 41

Changing Transmit

Bandwidth (SSB/AM) .................................... 41

Equalizing Transmit Audio (SSB/FM/AM) ...... 41

TRANSMIT INHIBIT ........................................... 41

CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE

TRANSMITTING................................................ 41

CW BREAK-IN....................................................... 42

USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR

FULL BREAK-IN ................................................ 42

ELECTRONIC KEYER .......................................... 42

CHANGING KEYING SPEED ............................ 42

AUTO WEIGHTING ........................................... 42

Reverse Keying Weight ................................ 42

BUG KEY FUNCTION ....................................... 43

CW MESSAGE MEMORY ................................. 43

Storing CW Messages .................................. 43

Checking CW Messages without

Transmitting .................................................. 43

Transmitting CW Messages .......................... 43

Changing Inter-message Interval Time .......... 43

Changing Sidetone Volume........................... 44

Inset Keying.................................................. 44

CHAPTER 9 SUB-RECEIVER

SUB-RECEIVER.................................................... 45

TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND .......................... 45

TX BAND ........................................................... 45

CONTROL BAND .............................................. 45

RECEIVING........................................................... 45

ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER .................. 45

CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER ............. 45

SELECTING A BAND ........................................ 45

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF)

GAIN ................................................................. 45

ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH ............................ 45

SELECTING A FREQUENCY ............................ 45

SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER ...................... 45

SELECTING A MODE FOR

THE SUB-RECEIVER ........................................ 45

FM CTCSS OPERATION ................................... 45

FM DCS OPERATION ....................................... 45

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN ..................................... 45

DCS CODE ID SCAN ........................................ 46

ATTENUATOR ................................................... 47

PRE-AMPLIFIER ............................................... 47

DUAL WATCH ................................................... 47

SCAN ................................................................ 47

NOISE REDUCTION ......................................... 47

TRANSMITTING.................................................... 47

SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER .................. 47

MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 47

FM REPEATER OPERATION ............................ 47

REVERSE FUNCTION ...................................... 48

AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) .............. 48

TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 48

MEMORY .............................................................. 48

CHAPTER 9 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

PACKET RADIO .................................................... 49

BUILT-IN TNC ........................................................ 49

PREPARATION ..................................................... 50

DCD SENSE.......................................................... 50

RADIO TELETYPE ................................................ 51

AMTOR/PacTOR/CLOVER/G-TOR ....................... 52

SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE ............................... 52

DX PACKETCLUSTERS TUNE ............................. 53

SATELLITE OPERATION ...................................... 53

CHAPTER 9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE

DSP FILTERS ........................................................ 55

CHANGING THE RECEIVE

FILTER BANDWIDTH ........................................ 55

SSB/ FM/ AM Mode ...................................... 55

CW/ FSK Mode ............................................ 55

NOTCH FILTER (SSB) .......................................... 55

BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ FM/ AM) .............................. 56

NOISE REDUCTION ............................................. 65

SETTING THE N.R.1 LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ..... 56

SETTIGN THE N.R.2 TIME CONSTANT............ 56

NOISE BLANKER .................................................. 57

PRE-AMPLIFIER ................................................... 57

ATTENUATOR ....................................................... 57

CHAPTER 10 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY CHANNELS .......................................... 58

STORING DATA IN MEMORY ........................... 58

Simplex Channels ......................................... 58

Split-Frequency Channels ............................. 59

MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL .................... 59

Memory Recall.............................................. 59

Memory Scroll ............................................... 60

Temporary Frequency Changes .................... 60

Memory-VFO Split Operation ........................ 60

MEMORY TRANSFER ...................................... 61

Memory ➡ VFO Transfer ............................. 61

Channel ➡ Channel Transfer ....................... 61

STORING FREQUENCY RANGES ................... 62

Confirming Start/End Frequencies ................ 62

Programmable VFO ...................................... 62

ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS ..................... 62

MEMORY CHANNEL LOCKOUT....................... 63

MEMORY CHANNEL NAME ............................. 63

QUICK MEMORY .................................................. 64

STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY .................... 64

RECALLING QUICK MEMORY ......................... 64

TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES .......... 64

QUICK MEMORY ➡ VFO TRANSFER .............. 64

CHAPTER 11 SCAN

NORMAL SCAN .................................................... 65

VFO SCAN ........................................................ 65

PROGRAM SCAN ............................................. 67

PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED.......... 66

SCAN HOLD ..................................................... 67

MHZ SCAN........................................................ 67

MEMORY SCAN.................................................... 67

SCAN RESUME METHOD ................................ 67

ALL-CHANNEL SCAN ....................................... 68

GROUP SCAN AND MEMORY GROUPS ......... 68

CALL SCAN ........................................................... 69

VISUAL SCAN ....................................................... 69

USING VISUAL SCAN ....................................... 69

SELECTING THE NUMBER OF

CHANNELS TO SCAN ...................................... 69

CHAPTER 12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

INITIAL SETTINGS ................................................

PARTIAL RESET ...................................................

FULL RESET .........................................................

SWITCHING ANT 1/ ANT 2........................................

FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION ..............................

BEEP FUNCTION......................................................

DISPLAY DIMMER ....................................................

PROGRAM FUNCTION BUTTON .............................

QUICK DATA TRANSFER .........................................

SETTING UP .........................................................

Equipment Needed ...........................................

Connections .....................................................

USING QUICK TRANSFER ...................................

Transferring Data ..............................................

Receiving Data .................................................

COMPUTER CONTROL............................................

SETTING UP .........................................................

Equipment Needed ...........................................

Connections .....................................................

COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS .......................

USING A TRANSVERTER .........................................

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER ...............................

PRESETTING .......................................................

DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT (OPTIONAL)

53RECORDING MESSAGES ....................................

MESSAGE PLAYBACK .........................................

Checking Messages .........................................

Sending Messages ...........................................

Changing Inter-message Interval ......................

Changing Volume .............................................

VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL) ................

CHAPTER 13 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

CHAPTER 14 INSTALLING OPTIONS

REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE ............................

DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT .......................

VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT............................

CHAPTER 15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

COMPUTER ..............................................................

COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER ..................................

RTTY EQUIPMENT ...................................................

LINEAR AMPLIFIER ..................................................

ANTENNA TUNER ....................................................

MCP AND TNC ..........................................................

CHAPTER 16 MAINTENANCE

GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................

SERVICE...............................................................

SERVICE NOTE ....................................................

CLEANING ............................................................

INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS ......................................

ACCESSING THE INTERNAL FUSE .....................

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................

SPECIFICATIONS

APPENDIX: COM CONNECTOR PROTOCOL

INDEX

ANTENNA CONNECTION

An antenna system consists of an antenna, feed line,

and ground. The transceiver can give excellent

results if the antenna system and its installation are

given careful attention. Use a properly adjusted 50 Ω

antenna of good quality, a high-quality 50 Ω coaxial

cable, and first-quality connectors. All connections

must be clean and tight.

After making the connections, match the impedance

of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is

1.5:1 or less. High SWR will cause the transmit

output to drop and may lead to radio frequency

interference to consumer products such as stereo

receivers and televisions. You may even interfere

with your own transceiver. Reports that your signal is

distorted could indicate that your antenna system is

not efficiently radiating the transceiver’s power.

Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna feed line

to ANT 1 on the rear of the transceiver. If you are

using two HF/ 50 MHz antennas, connect the

secondary antenna to ANT 2. Connect VHF

(144MHz), UHF (430/440 MHz), and 1.2 GHz

(Optional) antennas to their respective antenna

connectors on the rear of the transceiver. Refer to

page 13 for the location of the antenna connectors.

◆

Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other

matched load may damage the transceiver. Always connect

the antenna to the transceiver before transmitting.

◆

All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning arrester

to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and transceiver

damage.

Note: The transceiver’s protection circuit will activate when the SWR

is greater than 2.5:1; however, do not rely on protection to

compensate for a poorly functioning antenna system.

INSTALLATION

GROUND CONNECTION

At the minimum, a good DC ground is required to

prevent such dangers as electric shock. For superior

communications results, a good RF ground is

required, against which the antenna system can

operate. Both of these conditions can be met by

providing a good earth ground for your station. Bury

one or more ground rods or a large copper plate

under the ground, then connect this to the transceiver

GND terminal. Use heavy gauge wire or a copper

strap, cut as short as possible, for this connection.

Do not use a gas pipe, an electrical conduit, or a

plastic water pipe as a ground.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Even in areas where lightning storms are less

common, there are usually a limited number of

storms each year. Consider carefully how to protect

your equipment and home from lightning. The

installation of a lightning arrestor is a start, but there

is more that you can do. For example, terminate your

antenna system transmission lines at an entry panel

that you install outside your home. Ground this entry

panel to a good outside ground, then connect the

appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and

your transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs,

disconnecting the feed lines from your transceiver will

ensure added protection.

Connect all accessories to the transceiver {pages 3, 60}.

Accessories include the following:

• Microphone

• Antenna Tuner

• CW Key

• Computer

• TNC/ Multimode Communications

Processor

|nstall and connect an antenna system

{page 1}.

Install a ground system that satisfies DC

and RF grounding requirements {page 2}.

Install lightning protection to protect the

antenna system, your personal safety,

and your property {page 2}.

Install and connect a DC power supply {page 2}.

• Headphones

• External Speaker

• RTTY Equipment

• Linear Amplifier

DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

In order to use this transceiver, you need a separate

13.8 V DC power supply that must be purchased

separately. Do not directly connect the transceiver to

an AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cable to

connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply.

Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires.

The current capacity of the power supply must be

20.5 A peak or more.

First, connect the DC power cable to the regulated

DC power supply; the red lead to the positive terminal

and the black lead to the negative terminal. Next,

connect the DC power cable to the transceiver’s DC

power connector. Press the connectors firmly

together until the locking tab clicks.

Note:

◆

Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver, be

sure to switch OFF the DC power supply and transceiver.

◆

Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until you

make all connections.

UTILIZING THE BAIL

This transceiver is equipped with a bail so that you

can angle the transceiver. The bail is located on the

bottom of the transceiver. Pull the bail forward to the

limit as shown.

REPLACING FUSES

If the fuse blows, determine the cause then correct

the problem. Only after the problem has been

resolved, replace the blown fuse with a new one with

the specified ratings. If newly installed fuses continue

to blow, disconnect the power plug and contact a

KENWOOD service station or your dealer for

assistance.

1 INSTALLATION

noitacoLesuF gnitaRtnerruCesuF

0002-ST A4

)renutannetnalanretxenaroF(

rewopCDdeilppuS elbac A52

TS-2000/ TS-2000X

TS-B2000

Fuse holders

DC 13.8V

Red

Black

Pull the bail

1 INSTALLATION

ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS

FRONT PANEL

■Headphones (PHONES)

Connect monaural or stereo headphones having a

4 to 32 Ω impedance. This jack accepts a

6.3 mm (1/4") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) or

3-conductor (stereo) plug. After connecting the

headphones, you will hear no sound from the

internal (or optional external) speaker.

■Microphone (MIC)

Connect a microphone having an impedance

between 250 and 600 Ω. Fully insert the

connector, then screw the retaining ring clockwise

until secure. Compatible microphones include the

MC-43S, MC-47, MC-52DM, MC-60A, MC-80,

MC-85, and MC-90. Do not use the MC-44,

MC-44DM, MC-45, MC-45E, MC-45DM,

MC-45DME, and MC-53DM microphones.

REAR PANEL

■External Speakers (EXT.SP1/ EXT.SP2)

This transceiver has 2 independent receivers.

Thus, it can output 2 separate audio signals. As a

default, the transceier mixes both audio signals

internally and outputs them from the internal

speaker. On the rear panel of the transceiver,

there are 2 external speaker jacks. If an external

speaker is connected to EXP.SP1, the internal

speaker will mute. If the speaker is connected to

EXT.SP2, both the external speaker and the

internal speaker will function. Use only external

speakers with an impedance of 4 to 8 Ω. These

jacks accept only 3.5 mm (1/8") diameter,

2-conductor (mono) plugs.

Do not connect headphones to this jack. The high audio output

of this jack could damage your hearing.

■Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY)

For CW operation using the internal electronic

keyer, connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE

jack. For CW operation without using the internal

electronic keyer, connect a straight key,

semi-automatic key (bug), electronic keyer, or the

CW keyed output from a Multimode

Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY

jack. The PADDLE and KEY jacks mate with a 6.3

mm (1/4") 3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm (1/8")

2-conductor plug respectively. External electronic

keyers or MCPs must use positive keying to be

compatible with this transceiver. Use a shielded

cable between the key and the transceiver.

Note: Due to the functionality of the internal electronic keyer, you

may find it unnecessary to connect both a paddle and another

type of keyer unless you want to use a PC-based keyer for CW.

Read the “ELECTRONIC KEYER” section {page 42} to become

familiar with the internal keyer.

TS-2000

TS-2000X

TS-B2000

GND GND dash dot

8V(10 mA max)

Microphone

Headphone

TS-2000

TS-2000X

TS-B2000

MIC connector (Front view)

External speaker

• Paddle• Straight key

• Bug key

• Electronic keyer

• MCP CW output

MIC

PTT

DOWN

GND(STBY)

GND(MIC)

YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50 MHz band)

YOUR FIRST QSO

RECEIVING

Are you ready to give your TS-2000(X) a quick try? Reading these two pages should get your voice on the

air in your first QSO on the HF/ 50 MHz band shortly. The instructions below are intended only for a quick

guide. If you encounter problems or there is something you don’t understand, read the detailed explanations

given later in this manual.

Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to

briefly try the transceiver.

qSet the following as specified:

•MAIN AF: Fully counterclockwise

•MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise

•MAIN SQL: Fully counterclockwise

wSwitch ON the DC power supply, then press

and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly on the

transceiver.

• Do not press the switch for more than

approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver

will be switched OFF.

• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears,

followed by the selected frequency and

other indicators.

eConfirm that VFO A has been selected for

communications; “tA” should be visible on

the display. If it has not, press [A/B] to select

VFO A.

rTurn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise

until you hear a suitable level of background

noise.

tPress [+] or [–] to select an HF/ 50 MHz

Amateur radio band.

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

18 5 3 1 7 1 4

yPress [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [FM/ AM/ NAR] to

select an operating mode.

• To select the second mode on each button,

press the same button again. For example,

each press of [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] switches

between LSB and USB modes.

uIf you have selected FM, turn the MAIN SQL

control clockwise until the background noise is

just eliminated; The MAIN band LED (above the

[MIC/ CAR] key) turns off.

• With LSB or USB selected, skip this step.

iTurn the Tuning control to tune in a station.

• If you do not hear any stations, you may have

the wrong antenna connector selected. Press

[FUNC], [AT/ ANT 1/2] to switch between the

antenna 1 and 2 connectors.

TRANSMITTING

2 YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50 MHz band)

q Turn the Tuning control to tune in a desired

station or to select an unused frequency.

wPress [AT/ ANT 1/2] momentarily.

• “AT” appears.

ePress and hold [AT/ ANT 1/2] to activate the

built-in antenna tuner.

• “AT” starts blinking and the MAIN band LED

above the [MIC/ CAR] key turns red.

• Tuning should be completed in under

20 seconds, then “AT” stops blinking.

• If tuning is not completed within 20 seconds,

error beeps sound. Press [AT/ ANT 1/2] to

stop the error beeps and quit tuning. Check

your antenna system before continuing. If you

do not press [AT/ ANT 1/2], tuning will continue

for approximately 60 seconds.

Note: You will hear a lot of clicking sounds coming from the

transceiver while the antenna tuner is trying to tune the

antenna. This is simply the relay switches turning ON and OFF.

rWith LSB, USB, or AM selected, press

[MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone Gain

Adjust.

• “MIC GAIN 50” appears.

• With FM selected, skip this step.

tPress [SEND].

• The MAIN band LED turns red.

yBegin speaking into the microphone in your

normal tone of voice.

uLSB/ USB: While speaking into the

microphone, adjust the MULTI/ CH control so

that the ALC meter reflects according to your

voice level.

AM: While speaking into the microphone,

adjust the MULTI/ CH control so that the

calibrated power meter slightly reflects to your

voice level.

FM: Skip this step.

i When you finish speaking, press [SEND] to

return to receive mode.

oPress [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain

Adjustment.

Note: If desired, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} to try the

Microphone Gain Adjust for FM.

This completes your introduction to the

TS-2000(X), but there is a great deal more to

know. “OPERATING BASICS” {page 18} and the

following chapters explain all the functions of this

transceiver, starting with the most basic,

commonly-used functions.

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C.T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

4 9

YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)

YOUR FIRST QSO

RECEIVING

ePress [MAIN], then confirm that VFO A has

been selected for communications; “tA”

should be visible on the display. If it has not,

press [A/B] to select VFO A.

rTurn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise

until you hear a suitable level of background

noise.

tPress [+] or [–] to move up to the VHF

(144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440 MHz) Amateur

radio band.

If your primary operating band is VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440 MHz), the TS-2000(X) can also serve you

as a powerful All-mode VHF/ UHF transceiver. The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide to

get you up on the air on the VHF/ UHF band. If you encounter problems or there is something you don’t

understand, read the detailed explanations given later in this manual.

Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to

briefly try the transceiver.

qSet the following as specified:

•MAIN AF: Fully counterclockwise

•MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise

•MAIN SQL: Fully counterclockwise

wSwitch ON the DC power supply, then press

and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly on the

transceiver.

• Do not press the switch for more than

approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver

will be switched OFF.

• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears,

followed by the selected frequency and

other indicators.

yConfirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is not,

press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM.

uTurn the SQL control clockwise until the

background noise is just eliminated; The MAIN

band LED turns off.

iTurn the Tuning control to tune in a station.

• You can use the MULTI/ CH control to change

the frequency faster. If you do not hear any

stations, the antenna may not be installed or

connected properly. Check the antenna

connector on the rear panel {page 13}.

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

18 5 3 1 7 1 4

3 YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)

TRANSMITTING

qConfirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is

not, press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to change the

operating mode to FM.

w Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH

control to tune in a desired station or to select an

unused frequency.

ePress [SEND].

• The MAIN band LED turns red.

rBegin speaking into the microphone in your

normal tone of voice.

tWhen you finish speaking, press [SEND] to

return to receive mode.

This completes your introduction on how to receive

and transmit using the TS-2000(X) on a VHF/ UHF

band. Refer to “OPERATING BASICS” {page 18}

and the following chapters for explanations on all

the functions of this transceiver.

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C .T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

1 23 5

GETTING ACQUAINTED

q PF key

You can assign a function to this Programmable

Function key. The default function is Voice 1

{page 77}.

w [ ] (POWER) switch

Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power

ON. Press again to switch the power OFF.

e ATT/ F LOCK key

Press to switch the receiver attenuator ON or OFF

{page 57}. Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to switch

the Frequency Lock function ON or OFF {page 76}.

r PRE/ LOCK A key

Press to switch the receiver pre-amplifier ON or OFF

{page 57}. Press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to lock all

the transceiver keys {page 77}.

t VOX/ LEVEL key

In voice mode, press to switch the Voice-Operated

Transmit function ON or OFF {page 39}. In CW

mode, press to switch the Break-in function ON or

OFF {page 42}. Press [FUNC], [VOX/ LEVEL] to

adjust the microphone input level for VOX operation.

The VOX LED lights orange when the VOX function is

active.

y PROC/ LEVEL key

Press to switch the Speech Processor for transmitting

ON or OFF {page 40}. Press [FUNC],

[PROC/ LEVEL] to adjust the Speech Processor

input level. The PROC LED lights orange when the

Speech Processor function is active.

u SEND key

Press to switch the transceiver between receive

mode and transmit mode {page 5, 7}.

FRONT PANEL

i AT/ ANT 1/2 key

Press to activate the internal antenna tuner {page 72}

or an external antenna tuner. Press [FUNC],

[AT/ ANT 1/2] to select either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2

for the HF/ 50 MHz band.

o PHONES jack

Connect a set of headphones to this jack. Inserting a

plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from

the speaker {pages 3, 78}.

!0 MIC connector

Connect a compatible microphone to this connector,

then securely screw down the connector locking ring

{page 3}.

!1 N.R./ LEVEL key

Press to switch the DSP Noise Reduction function

ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL] to adjust

the Noise Reduction level. Press [FUNC],

[N.R./ LEVEL] again to finish the adjustment

{page 56}.

!2 A.N./ LEVEL key

Press to switch the DSP Auto Notch function ON or

OFF. Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] to adjust the

DSP Auto Notch reduction level. Press [FUNC],

[A.N./ LEVEL] again to finish the adjustment

{page 56}.

!3 B.C./ MANUAL key

Press to switch the DSP Auto Beat Canceler function

ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL] to

adjust the beat cancel frequency manually. Press

[FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL] again to finish the manual

adjustment {page 56}.

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

!4 Multi-purpose keypad

Consists of 10 keys that are used to enter numeric

data. Also used for the following functions:

•1/ CH1/REC, 2/ CH2/REC, and 3/ CH3/REC keys

Press to play back or record the CW or voice

messages that are associated with the DRU-3A

Digital Recording Unit {page 89} and the internal

electronic keyer {page 43} .

•4/ TONE/SEL key

Press to activate the sub-audible Tone function to

access repeaters for FM mode. To select the Tone

frequency, press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL], then

select your desired tone frequency using the

MULTI/ CH control {page 33}.

•5/ METER key

Press to select the meter scales {page 14}.

•6/ CTCSS/SEL key

Press to activate the Continuous Tone Coded

Squelch System (CTCSS) function for FM mode.

To select the CTCSS tone frequency, press

[FUNC], [5/ CTCSS/SEL], then select your

desired CTCSS tone frequency using the

MULTI/ CH control {page 35}.

•7/ NB/LEVEL key

Press to switch the analog Noise Blanker ON or

OFF. Press [FUNC], [7/ NB/LEVEL] to adjust the

Noise Blanker level {page 57}.

•8/ AGC/OFF key

Press to adjust the response time of the Automatic

Gain Control. To switch the AGC OFF, press

[FUNC], [8/ AGC/OFF] {page 38}.

•9/ FINE/STEP key

Press to activate the Fine tuning mode to allow

more precise tuning {page 38}.

••/ DCS/SEL key

Press to activate the Digital Coded Squelch

function for FM mode. To select the DCS code,

press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL], then select your

desired code using the MULTI/ CH control {page

36}.

•0/ SHIFT/OFFSET key

Press to switch the Shift function for FM mode ON

or OFF when accesing the repeaters. The Shift

frequency can be manually adjusted by pressing

[FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET], then adjusting the

shift frequency value using the MULTI/ CH control

{page 32}.

•ENT key

Press to enter your desired frequency using the

keypad {page 37}.

!5 FUNC key

Press to access the secondary functions that are

assigned to the keys. While FUNC is active, the

FUNC LED lights orange.

!6 MIC/ CAR key

Press to adjust the microphone gain {page 20}.

While the Speech Processor function is ON, it

becomes the Speech Processor output level

adjustment key.

Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to adjust the carrier level

for CW, FSK and AM mode {pags 20}.

!7 PWR/ TX MONI key

Press to adjust the output power {page 20}. Press

[FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI] to monitor your

transmission signal {page 79}.

!8 KEY/ DELAY key

Press to adjust the internal electronic keyer speed.

Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] to adjust the VOX

delay time or break-in time (Full break-in/ Semi

break-in time) for CW mode {page 42}.

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

!9 LSB/ USB/ AUTO key

Press to select lower sideband (LSB) or upper

sideband (USB) mode for voice or digital operation.

Press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to toggle the auto

mode selection {page 73}.

@0 CW/ FSK/ REV key

Press to select CW or FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)

mode {pages 30, 51}. Press [FUNC],

[CW/ FSK/ REV] to reverse the sideband pitch.

@1 FM/ AM/ NAR key

Press to select FM or AM mode. Press [FUNC],

[FM/ AM/ NAR ] to select narrow bandwidth

transmission mode {page 29}.

@2 CLR key

Press to exit from, abort, or reset various functions.

Also used to erase memory channels {page 62} or

locking out memory channels from the scan list {page

62}.

@3 DISP key

Press to toggle the normal operating mode and DSP

filter setting display mode {page 55}. Press and hold

to start the Visual Scan function {page 70}.

@4 1MHz/ SEL key

Press to switch the MHz Up/ Down function ON or

OFF using the MULTI/ CH control. Press [FUNC],

[1MHz/ SEL] to change the increment/ decrement

step value {page 37}. Press and hold to start the

MHz Scan function {page 68}.

@5 Tuning control

Turn to select the desired frequency {page 37}. Use the

convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous tuning.

The lever behind this control adjusts the control torque

level; turn fully clockwise for light torque or fully

counterclockwise for heavy torque.

@6 CTRL key

Press to toggle the operating controls between the

main transceiver and the sub-receiver. The

transmission band is not affected by this key.

@7 MENU key

Press to select or cancel the Menu mode that is used

for activating and configuring functions {page 21}.

@8 TF-SET key

While operating split-frequency, press to monitor or

change your transmit frequency {page 31}.

@9 +/ – (Up/ Down) keys

Press to step through all the Amateur radio bands

consecutively {page 18}. Also used to make

selections from the Menu {page 21}, and to check the

Start and End frequencies of the Scan function

{page 62}.

#0 MAIN key

Press to transfer the operating controls to the MAIN

transceiver. Also moves the transmission band to the

main transceiver frequency.

#1 SUB key

Press to transfer the operating controls to the sub-

receiver. Also moves the trasmission band to the

sub-receiver frequency.

#2 SCAN/ SG.SEL key

Press to start or stop the Scan function {page 66}.

Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to select a scan

group {page XX}.

#3 CALL/ C.IN key

Press to recall a call channel for the selected

operating band (HF/ 50 MHz/ 144 MHz/ 430

(440) MHz/ 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 Optional). Press

[FUNC], [CALL/ C.IN] to write a new Call Channel to

the memory {page 75}.

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

21 24

2519 27 28 33

20 29

26 32

30 31

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

#4 QUICK MEMO keys

Controls the Quick Memory function {page 64}.

•MR key

Press to recall data from the Quick Memory

{page 65}.

•M.IN key

Press to write data into the Quick Memory

{page 64}.

#5 SATL key

Press to activate Satelite communication mode

{page 53}.

#6 Frequency control keys

These keys control functions related to selecting a

frequency, a VFO, or a memory channel.

•A/B / M/S key

Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 18}.

In Satelite mode, press to swap the MAIN and

SUB frequencies so that you can change the

frequencies with a main Tuning control {page 54}.

•SPLIT/ REV key

Press to use split-frequency operation which

allows you to use different transmit and receive

frequencies {page 31}. In Satelite mode, press to

toggle the Trace Reverse function ON and OFF

{page 54}.

•VFO/M / VFO/CH key

Press to select either Memory or VFO mode

{page 59}. In Satelite mode, press to toggle the

VFO and memory channel operations {page 54}.

•A=B/ TRACE key

Press to copy the data in the currently selected

VFO to the other VFO {page 31}. In Satelite

mode, press to toggle the TRACE function ON and

OFF {page 54}.

#7 Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL key

Press to transfer data from a memory channel to a

VFO {page XX}. Press [FUNC], [M/ VFO/ MG. SEL]

to enter Memory Group Select mode.

#8 M.IN key

Writes data into a memory channel {page 58} or

selects Memory Scroll mode {page 59}.

#9 RIT/ CW TUNE key

Press to switch the Receive Incremental Tuning

function ON or OFF {page 38}. Press [FUNC],

[RIT/ CW TUNE] to activate the automatic zero-beat

function for CW mode {page 30}.

$0 XIT/ ALT key

Press to switch the Transmit Incremental Tuning

function ON or OFF {page 40}. Press [FUNC],

[XIT/ ALT] to switch the Auto Lock Tuning mode for

the 1.2 GHz band (FM) ON or OFF {page 72}.

$1 CLEAR key

Press to reset the RIT/XIT frequency offset to zero

{pages 38, 40}.

$2 SET/ P.C.T. key

Press to set received DX Packet Cluster frequency

data to the main transceiver when the Packet Cluster

Tune mode is activated. Press [FUNC],

[SET/P.C.T.] to switch the Packet Cluster Tune mode

ON or OFF {page 53}.

$3 TNC Status Indicators

• 9.6k LED

Lights when the internal TNC is operating at

9600 bps. The default operating mode is

1200 bps {page 50}.

• STA LED

Lights when the internal TNC holds the data in the

buffer to transmit.

• CON LED

Lights when the internal TNC is connected to

another TNC.

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

36 35

4041

4234 4339

37 38

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

$4 RIT/SUB control

After switching the RIT or XIT function ON, turn this

control to select the desired frequency offset {pages

38, 40}.

Turn to adjust the sub-receiver frequency when the

RIT and XIT functions are switched OFF and the sub-

receiver is switched ON {page 45}.

$5 MANUAL BC control

Turn to adjust the audio notch frequency while the

DSP beat cancel function is set to manual audio

notch filter mode {page 56}.

$6 MAIN RF GAIN control

Turn to adjust the radio frequency gain for the main

transceiver {page 18}.

$7 MULTI/ CH control

In VFO mode, rotate to step the operating frequency

up or down {page 37}. In memory channel mode,

rotate to select a memory channel {page 58}. Also

used for selecting Menu numbers when accessing the

Menu mode {page 21} and as a selector to choose

settings for various functions activated by front panel

buttons. The MULTI/ CH LED lights when the

setting(s) can be changed using the MULTI/ CH

control.

$8 MAIN SQL control

Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, head

phone and AF output on ACC2 (13-pin DIN

connector) when no receive signal is present on the

main transceiver {page 19}.

$9 MAIN AF control

Turn to adjust the volume on the main transceiver

{page 19}.

%0 SUB SQL control

Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, head

phone and AF output on ACC2 (13-pin DIN

connector) when no receive signal is present on the

sub-receiver {page 46}.

%1 SUB AF control

Press to switch the sub-receiver ON or OFF. When it

is ON, the SUB-receiver LED lights orange.

Turn to adjust the volume for the sub-receiver.

%2 LO/ WIDTH control

Turn clockwise/ counterclockwise to increase/

decrease the value for the low cut-off DSP filter

frequency or the filter bandwidth (CW/ FSK). The

selected value appears on the main dot-matrix

display {page 55}.

%3 HI/ SHIFT control

Turn clockwise/ counterclockwise to increase/

decrease the value for the high cut-off DSP filter

frequency or the Shift frequency. The selected value

appears on the sub dot-matrix display

{page 55}.

%4 MAIN band LED

Lights green while the main transceiver’s squelch is

open. Lights red while transmitting on the main

transceiver’s VFO band.

%5 SUB band LED

Lights green while the sub-receiver’s squelch is open.

Lights red while transmitting on the sub-receiver’s

VFO band.

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

474654 55 4445

5352 51504948

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

REAR PANEL

q ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors

Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna to ANT1.

If you are using 2 antennas for the HF/ 50 MHz band,

connect the secondary antenna to the ANT2

connector.

w GND post

Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between

the ground post and the nearest earth ground

{page 2}.

e KEY and PADDLE jacks

The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.3 mm (1/4")

3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to the

internal electronic keyer. The KEY jack mates with a

3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug for connecting an

external key for CW operation. Read “Keys and

Keyboards for CW Operation” {page 3} before using

these jacks.

r AT connector

Mates with the connector on the cable supplied with

the external antenna tuner. Refer to the instruction

manual supplied with the tuner for more information.

t ANT 144

Connect your 144 MHz band antenna to this

connector.

y ANT 430

Connect your 430 (440) MHz band antenna to this

connector.

u ANT 1.2G (TS-2000 Optional)

Connect your 1.2 GHz band antenna to this

connector.

i DC 13.8V power input connector

Connect a 13.8 V DC power source to this connector

{page 2}. Use the cable supplied with the regulated

DC power supply.

o COM connector

Mates with a 9-pin female RS-232C connector for

connecting a computer via one of its serial

communication ports {page XX}. Also used with the

Quick Data Transfer function {page XX}.

!0 PANEL connector

Connect a cable from the optional separate remote

panel (RM-2000) to this connector.

!1 EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 jacks

Mate with a 3.5 mm (1/8"), 2-conductor (mono) plugs

for connecting external speakers {pages 3, 78}.

!2 EXT.CONT connector

Connect your 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz or

1.2 GHz linear amplifier control cable to this

connector {page 76}.

!3 ACC2 connector

Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector for

connecting various accessory equipment, such as an

external TNC or a RTTY terminal {page XX, XX}.

!4 REMOTE connector

Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector for connecting

an HF linear amplifier {page 76}. Do not connect

50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, or 1.2 GHz linear

amplifier controls to this connector; use the

EXT.CONT connector instead.

!5 HF RX ANT connector

Connect a separate receive-only antenna for HF

bands to this jack (RCA connector) {page XX}.

EXT. SP2

8Ω

PANELCOM

ANT 2 ANT 1

ANT

144

AT ANT 1.2G

13.8V

ANT

430

EXT. SP1

8ΩACC2

EXT. CONT

REMOTE

RX ANT

PADDLE

KEY

GND

2 1

10 12 13 14 1511

32 4 5 86

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

DISPLAY

q METER

While receiving, serves as an S-meter to measure

and display the received signal strength. While

transmitting, serves as a power meter plus an ALC

meter, an SWR meter, or a Speech Processor

compression meter. The Peak Hold function holds

each reading for approximately 2.5 seconds.

Note: SWR meter works only for the HF and 50 MHz bands.

Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 73} or

an external antenna tuner is in-line for the HF/ 50

MHz band reception.

e AT

Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 73} or

an external antenna tuner is in-line for the HF/ 50

MHz band transmission.

Appears while HF RX ANT {page XX} connector is

enabled to receive HF band signals. You cannot

transmit the signals though this connector.

Either “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” appears, depending on

whether the Antenna 1 connector or the Antenna 2

connector is selected for the HF/ 50 MHz band

{page 12}.

y MHz

Appears when the MHz Up/ Down mode using the

MULTI/ CH control is switched ON {page 37}.

u ALT

Appears when ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) is activated for

the 1.2 GHz (FM) band {page 72}.

Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is

being used {page 59}.

Shows the memory channel number for the main

transceiver. If you select a channel over 99, a

leading digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number

ranges from 00 to 299). It also shows the Quick

Memory number location (the Quick Memory number

ranges from “0_” to “9_”).

!0 AUTO

Appears when Auto mode selection is activated

{page 73}.

Appears when the main transceiver is selected for the

transmission band.

Appears when the main transceiver’s functions can

be controlled using the front panel keys.

!3 ATT

Appears when the main transceiver’s receiver

attenuator (-12 dB) is ON {page 57}.

!4 TNC

Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the

main transceiver.

!5 PRE

Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the main

transceiver is ON {page 57}.

!6 + =

“+” or “–” appears, indicating which offset direction is

selected for the main transceiver. “=” appears when the

–7.6 MHz (430MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset is

selected (All E-types only) {page 32}.

2 4

93 5

11 13 15

12 14 16

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

!7 DCS

Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of the

main transceiver is ON {page 36}.

!8 [R]

“R” appears when the Reverse function of the main

transceiver is ON. “[R]” appears when the ASC

(Automatic Simplex Check) of the main transceiver is

activated {page 34}.

!9 C T

“T” appears when the Tone function of the main

transceiver is ON {page 33}. “C T” appears when the

Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) of

the main transceiver is ON {page 35}.

@0 AGC

Appears when the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of

the main transceiver is ON {page 38}. Disappears

when the AGC is OFF.

@1 M.B.C.

“B. C.” appears when the automatic Beat Canceller is

ON. “M.B.C.” appears when the single Beat Cancel

frequency is manually controlled {page 56}.

@2 NB

Appears when the Noise Blanker is ON

{page 57}.

@3 FINE

Appears when the Fine function for the main Tuning

control is ON {page 38}.

@4 A.NOTCH

Appears when the DSP Auto Notch function of the main

transceiver is ON {page 56}.

or appears, depending on whether DSP

Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enchanced method) or Noise

Reduction 2 (SPAC method) of the main transceiver is

selected {page 56}.

appears when the TX Equalizer function is ON.

appears when the RX Equalizer function of the

main transceiver is ON {pages 41, 77}.

Appears when the Menu Select function of the main

transceiver is ON {page 65}.

“TRACE” appears when the Trace function is ON while

in Satelite mode. “TRACE R” appears when the

Reverse Trace function is ON {page 53}.

@9 P.C.T.

Appears when Packet Cluster Tune mode is ON

{page 53}.

#0 SPLIT

Appears when the transmit frequency differs from the

receive frequency {page 31}.

#1 tt

tAss

“tt

tA” or “Ass

s” appears while VFO A is selected

{page 18}. “A” appears while Menu A is being accessed

{page 21}.

#2 tt

tBss

“tt

tB” or “Bss

s” appears while VFO B is selected

{page 18}. “B” appears while Menu B is being accessed

{page 21}.

#3 tt

tMss

“tt

tM” or “Mss

s” appears while a simplex memory

channel is selected {page 59}. “tt

tMss

s” appears while a

split frequency memory channel is selected {page 60}.

appears when the Frequency Lock function is

ON. appears when the Lock All key function is

ON {page 77}.

3331 3234

2117 19 23 25 282726 29

302218 2420

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

Appears while in Satelite mode {page 53}.

Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is

being used {page 40}.

Shows the memory channel number for the sub-

receiver. If you select a channel over 99, a leading

digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number ranges

from 00 to 299). It also shows the Quick Memory

number location (the Quick Memory number ranges

from “0_” to “9_”).

Appears when the sub-receiver is selected for the

transmission band.

Appears when the sub-receiver’s functions can be

controlled using the front panel keys.

$0 ATT

Appears when the sub-receiver’s receive attenuator

(–12 dB) is ON {page 57}.

$1 TNC

Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the

sub-receiver.

$2 XIT

Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning of the

main transceiver is ON {page 40}.

$3 PRE

Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the sub-

receiver is ON {page 57}.

$4 + =

“+” or “–” appears, indicating which offset direction is

selected for the sub-receiver. “=” appears when the

–7.6 MHz (430MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset is

selected (All E-types only) {page 32}.

$5 RIT

Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning of the

main transceiver is ON {page 38}.

$6 DCS

Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of the

sub-receiver is ON {page 36}.

$7 [R]

“R” appears when the Reverse function of the sub-

receiver is ON. “[R]” appears when the ASC

(Automatic Simplex Check) of the sub-receiver is

activated {page 34}.

$8 s

Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the

signal strength level {page 91}.

$9 PWR

Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the

output power level {page 20}.

Appears when the Menu Select function of the sub-

receiver is ON {page 65}.

%1 C T

“T” appears when the Tone function of the sub-

receiver is ON {page 33}. “C T” appears when the

Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) of

the sub-receiver is ON {page 35}.

Appears when the DSP Noise Reduction 1 of the sub-

receiver is selected {page 56}.

%3 PKT

Appears when the internal TNC is operating in Packet

mode {page 49}.

%4 PC

Appears when the TS-2000/B2000 is being controlled

by a PC {page 81}.

57 55 5842 45 49 48 56

38 40 43 534635 51

39 41 47 5452443637 50

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

The main transceiver operating frequency display.

When the sub-receiver is switched ON, it shows the

receive frequency for the sub-receiver. However, if

you are controlling the main transceiver functions,

such as RIT, XIT, or SPLIT, it is used to display the

frequency information for these functions {page 45}.

%7 MAIN dot-matrix display

In the normal operating mode, it displays the

operating mode for the main transceiver. It is also

used to display various control information, such as

menu numbers and settings and the DSP filter

configuration.

%8 SUB dot-matrix display

In the normal operating mode, it displays the

operating mode for the sub-receiver. It is also used

to display various control information, such as menu

information and the DSP filter frequency

configuration.

MICROPHONE

PTT

DWN UP

q UP/ DWN keys

Use these keys to step the VFO frequency, memory

channels, or Menu selections up and down. Press

and hold to these keys continuously change the

settings.

w PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch

The transceiver is placed in transmit mode when this

non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the

switch returns the transceiver to receive mode.

OPERATING BASICS

SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF

1Switch the DC power supply ON.

2Press and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly to switch

the transceiver ON.

• Do not press the switch for more than

approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver will

be switched OFF.

• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed by

the selected frequency and other indicators.

3To switch the transceiver OFF, press [ ]

(POWER) again.

4Switch the DC power supply OFF.

• You may skip step 3. After switching the

transceiver ON, you can switch it OFF or ON

using only the power switch of the DC power

supply. The transceiver stores the information

of the POWER switch position when the DC

power source is switched OFF.

ADJUSTING VOLUME

AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN

Turn the MAIN AF control clockwise to increase the

audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the

level.

Note: The position of the MAIN AF control does not affect the

volume of beeps caused by pressing keys nor the CW transmit

sidetone. The audio level for Packet operation is also independent of

the MAIN AF control setting.

RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN

Set the MAIN RF control fully clockwise. You may

turn it counterclockwise slightly when you have

trouble hearing the desired signal because of

excessive atmospheric noise or interference from

other stations. First take note of the peak S-meter

reading of the desired signal. Then turn the MAIN RF

control counterclockwise until the S-meter reads the

peak value that you noted. Signals that are weaker

than this level will be attenuated and reception of the

station will become easier.

Depending on the type and gain of your antenna, and

the condition of the band, you may also prefer leaving

the MAIN RF control turned counterclockwise by the

same amount rather than turning it fully clockwise.

When using FM mode, always set the MAIN RF

control fully clockwise.

SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B

2 VFOs are available for controlling the frequency on

the main transceiver. Each VFO, VFO A and VFO B,

works independently so that a different frequency and

mode can be selected. When SPLIT operation is

activated, VFO A is used for reception and VFO B is

used for transmission. The opposite combination is

also possible.

Press [A/B] to toggle between VFO A and VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to indicate which VFO is

selected.

SELECTING A BAND

Press [+] or [–] to select your desired band.

• Holding down either key changes the bands

continuously.

<PANEL>

F LOCK A

SEND AT

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

MAIN

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

MANUAL

BC MAIN

GAIN

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

MAIN

SUB

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

4 OPERATING BASICS

SELECTING A MODE

Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO], [CW/ FSK/ REV], or

[FM/ AM/ NAR]. To select the second mode on each

key, press the same key again. For example, each

press of [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] toggles between LSB

and USB mode.

Press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to toggle the Auto

Mode Selection for SSB. When it is active, “AUTO”

appears. If you change the frequency above or

below 9.5 MHz, the transceiver automatically

switches modes; LSB for frequencies under 9.5 MHz

and USB for frequencies equal to or above 9.5 MHz

(HF/ 50 MHz band). As for the 144 MHz, 430

(440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands, the transceiver

automatically changes the operating mode to FM.

You can further add the frequency table data to

change the mode automatically {page 73}.

ADJUSTING SQUELCH

The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker

when no signals are present. With the squelch level

correctly set, you will hear sound only while actually

receiving signals. The higher the selected squelch

level, the stronger the signals must be to receive.

The appropriate squelch level depends on the

ambient RF noise conditions.

Turn the MAIN SQL control, when there are no

signals present, to select the squelch level at which

the background noise is just eliminated; the MAIN

band LED will turn off. Many ham operators prefer

leaving the MAIN SQL control fully counterclockwise

unless operating on a full-carrier mode such as FM.

The squelch level for the main transceiver is preset at

the factory to approximately 9 o’clock for FM and 11

o’clock for SSB and AM.

SELECTING A FREQUENCY

Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic [UP]

to increase the frequency. Turn the Tuning control

counterclockwise or press Mic [DWN] to decrease the

frequency.

You may prefer directly entering a frequency using

the numeric keypad if the desired frequency is far

from the current frequency. Press [ENT], then press

the numeric keys as necessary. For details, see

“Direct Frequency Entry” {page 37}.

This transceiver provides many other methods for

quickly selecting a frequency. For further information,

see “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY” {page 36}.

FRONT PANEL METER

The multi-function meter measures the parameters in

the table below. The S-meter and FILTER scales

appear when the main transceiver is in receive mode,

and the PWR meter appears when it is in transmit

mode. Each press of [5/ METER] switches among

the ALC, SWR, and COMP meters. Peak readings

for the S-meter, ALC, SWR, COMP, and PWR

functions are held momentarily.

Note:

◆

The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor

is ON for SSB, FM, or AM mode.

◆

The PWR indicator shows the output power level as a

percentage on the 1.2 GHz band.

◆

The SWR meter works only for ANT 1 and ANT 2 (HF/ 50 MHz

band).

◆

Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.

reteM ?derusaeMsItahW

SslangisdeviecerfohtgnertS

RWP rewoptuptuotimsnarT

CLA sutatslortnoclevelcitamotuA

RWS oitarevawgnidnatsmetsysannetnA

PMOC gnisunehwlevelnoisserpmochceepS }04egap{rossecorPhceepSeht

RETLIF htdiwretlifPSD

AUTO

NAR

REV

LSB

USB

FSK

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

MAIN

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SEL

1MHz CTRL

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

FLOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

4 OPERATING BASICS

TRANSMITTING

For voice communications, press [SEND] or press

and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone

in your normal tone of voice. When you finish

speaking, press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].

To transmit CW, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the

Break-in function ON, then close the key or keyer

paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle {page 3},

then select CW mode.

For a detailed explanation on transmitting, see

“BASIC COMMUNICATIONS”, beginning on page 28.

Note: When using AM, CW, or FSK mode, you may adjust the

carrier level. In general, adjust the level so that the ALC meter reads

within the limits of the ALC zone. For the adjustment procedures,

refer to the instructions for each mode in “TRANSMITTING”

{page 39}.

SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER

It is wise to select a lower transmit power if

communication is still reliable. This lowers the risk of

interfering with others on the band. When operating

from battery power, selecting a lower transmit power

allows you more operating time before a charge is

necessary. This transceiver allows you to change the

transmit power even while transmitting.

1Press [PWR/ TX MONI].

• The current transmit power appears.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise to

reduce the power or clockwise to increase the

power.

• The selectable range differs, depending on the

current band and mode.

3Press [PWR/ TX MONI] to complete the setting.

Note: You may access Menu No. 23, “FINE TRANSMIT POWER

CHANGE STEP”, and select “ON” (press “+”) to change the step size

from 5 W to 1 W.

MICROPHONE GAIN

The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB

or AM mode is used without speech processing

{pages 28, 29}.

1Press [MIC/ CAR].

• The current microphone gain level appears.

The default is 50; the range is from 0 to 100.

2Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

3SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust

the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter

reflects your voice level, but does not exceed the

ALC limit.

AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust

the MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated

power meter slightly reflects your voice level.

CW, FSK: While transmitting, adjust the

MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects

the carrier level within the ALC zone.

4Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL control setting.

5Press [MIC/ CAR].

For FM mode, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} and

select “L” (low), “M” (medium), or “H” (high).

Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode,

select “H” (high) microphone gain. The microphone sensitivity is

low in FM mode. This may cause insufficient modulation. For

other microphones, select either “L” (low) or “M” (medium).

CAR

MIC

TX MONI

PWR

DELAY

KEY

POWER

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROK

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

MULTI

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY

MIC

PWR

KEY

POWER

FLOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROK

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

MULTI

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

POWER

F LOCK A

SEND AT

ANT1/2

PROK

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

POWER

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROK

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

MENU SETUP

WHAT IS A MENU?

Many functions on this transceiver are selected or

configured via a software-controlled Menu, rather

than through the physical controls of the transceiver.

Once familiar with the Menu system, you will

appreciate the versatility it offers. You can customize

the various timings, settings, and programming

functions on this transceiver to meet your needs

without using many controls and switches.

MENU A/ MENU B

This transceiver has two menus: Menu A and

Menu B. These menus contain identical functions

and can be configured independently. The

transceiver, therefore, allows you to switch between

two different environments quickly and easily. For

example, you can configure Menu A with one set of

transmit signal characteristics, DSP settings,

programmable keys, frequency steps, etc., and

Menu B with a completely different set. By switching

from Menu A to Menu B, you can instantly change

the Menu configuration and button assignment to suit

your current operating style. Or, two operators may

share a single transceiver by dedicating one Menu to

each operator. Both operators can always enjoy

their own configuration.

MENU ACCESS

1Press [MENU].

• The Menu No. and setting appear on the main

dot-matrix display, and the explanation of the

menu appears on the sub dot-matrix display.

2Press [A/B] to select Menu A or Menu B.

• “A” or “B” appears, indicating which Menu is

selected.

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired

Menu No.

• Each time you change the Menu No., a

different scrolling message appears on the sub

dot-matrix display, describing the Menu No.

• You will see “PUSH SUB” if there are sub-

menus in the Menu No. Pressing [SUB]

allows you to select from among the sub-

menus. Press [MAIN] to exit the sub-menu

selection.

4Press [+], [–], Mic [UP], or Mic [DWN] to select a

parameter.

5Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.

QUICK MENU

Because the number of functions this transceiver

provides is extraordinary, there are numerous items in

each Menu. If you find accessing desired Menu Nos.

to be too time consuming, use the Quick Menu to

create your own customized, abbreviated Menu. You

can then add those Menu Nos. which you frequently

use, to the Quick Menu. Copying Menu Nos. to the

Quick Menu has no effect on the Menu.

PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU

1Press [MENU].

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired

Menu No.

3Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

• A star appears, indicating that the Menu item

has been added to the Quick Menu.

• To remove the item from the Quick Menu,

press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] again.

4Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.

Note: You cannot add the sub menu No. to the Quick Menu. Press

[MAIN] to go back to the main menu No., then press QUICK MEMO

[M.IN] to add the menu No. to the Quick Menu.

USING THE QUICK MENU

1Press [MENU].

2Press [1MHz/ SEL].

• “MHz” appears.

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired

Quick Menu No.

4Press [+], [–], Mic [UP], or Mic [DWN] to change

the current setting for the selected Menu No.

5Press [MENU] to exit Quick Menu mode.

Note: If the Quick Menu has not been programmed, turning the

MULTI/ CH control in step 3 causes “CHECK” to be output in Morse

code.

5 MENU SETUP

MENU CONFIGURATION

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR gaPe

rotarepO ecafretnI

00 ssenthgirbyalpsiD mumixam:4,muminim:1,FFO 4ot1/FFO357

10noitanimulliyeKFFO/NONO57

gninuT lortnoC

20noituloverrepegnahclortnocgninuT0001/005000183

30htiwgninuT HC/ITLUM lortnocFFO/NONO73

40 gnisuybdegnahcseicneuqerfOFVffosdnuoReht HC/ITLUM lortnoc FFO/NONO73

50 ehtrofezispetsycneuqerF HC/ITLUM lortnoc

dnabtsacdaorbMAehtniedomMArof zHk01/zHk9

eeS ecnerefeR egaP

yromeM lennahC

60lennahCyromeM sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht –

A60noitarepotilpsOFV-yromeMFFO/NOFFO06

B60 lennahcyromem)FFO(dexifro)NO(elbanuT seicneuqerf FFO/NOFFO06

nacS noitarepO

70dewolsyllaitrapnacsmargorPFFO/NOFFO66

80 margorPehtrofegnarycneuqerfnwodwolS nacs /004/003/002/001 zH005 toN dexif 66

90dlohnacsmargorPFFO/NOFFO76

01dohtememusernacS /detarepo-emiT detarepo-reirraC

-emiT

detarepo

11egnarnacslausiV 181/19/16/13 slennahc 16

slennahc

rotinoM dnuoS

21 leveltuptuopeeB mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO 9ot1,FFO447

31 emulovenotedisXT mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO 9ot1,FFO503

41 emulovkcabyalp3-URD mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO 9ot1,FFO498

51 emulovkcabyalp3-SV mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO 9ot1,FFO419

rekaepS tuptuO

enohpdaehro2PSrofnoitarugifnoctuptuooiduA

2/1/0087

0xiMbuS/niaM:)R(1PS xiMbuS/niaM:)L(2PS

1xiMbuS+niaM4/1:)R(1PS xiMbuS4/1+niaM:)L(2PS

2buS:)R(1PS niaM:)L(2PS

71 eht(2PS.TXEdna1PS.TXEehtsesreveR .tuptuooidua)slennahcR/Lkcajenohpdaeh FFO/NOFFO87

5 MENU SETUP

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR egaP

annetnAXR81rotcennocTNAXRFHmorftupninaelbanEFFO/NOFFO37

retem-S hcleuqS

91edomMFrofhcleuqsretem-S sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht –

A91edomMFrofhcleuqsretem-SelbanEFFO/NOFFO87

B91hcleuqsretem-SrofemitgnaH 005/052/521/FFO sm FFO87

PSD rezilauqE

rezilauqeXRPSD

F/TSOOBH/FFO /TSOOBB/SSAP RESU/NEVNOC FFO77

FFOtalF:

TSOOBHtsoobhgiH:

SSAPFssaptnamroF:

TSOOBBtsoobssaB:

NEVNOClanoitnevnoC:

RESU)devreseR(talF:

rezilauqeXTPSD

F/TSOOBH/FFO /TSOOBB/SSAP RESU/NEVNOC FFO14

FFOtalF:

TSOOBHtsoobhgiH:

SSAPFssaptnamroF:

TSOOBBtsoobssaB:

NEVNOClanoitnevnoC:

RESU)devreseR(talF:

retliFPSD22MAroBSSrofhtdiwdnabretlifXTPSD /8.2/6.2/4.2/2.2/0.2 zHk0.3

zHk4.2

gninuTeniF32gninutrewoptimsnarteniFFFO/NOFFO83

TOT42remiT-tuO-emiT 03/02/01/5/3/FFO setunim FFO87

retrevsnarT52yalpsidycneuqerfretrevsnarTNO/FFOFFO87

annetnA renuT

62gninutehtetelpmocTAnehwdlohXTNO/FFOFFO27

72gniviecerelihwTAenil-nINO/FFOFFO37

raeniL reifilpmA

82lortnocreifilpmaraeniL sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht –

A82dnabFHrofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67

B82dnabzHM05rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67

C82dnabzHM441rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67

D82 zHM)044(034rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnab 2/1/FFOFFO67

E82dnabzHG2.1rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67

egasseM kcabyalP

92kcabyalpegassemWCdnaecioV sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht –

A92kcabyalpehttaepeRNO/FFOFFO ,4409

B92kcabyalpehtgnitaeperrofemitlavretnI ni(sdnoces06ot0 )dnoces1fospets .ces01 ,44 09

5 MENU SETUP

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR egaP

03kcabyalprevoytiroirpgniyeKNO/FFOFFO44

13ycneuqerfenotedisXT/hctipXRWC zH0001ot004 )zH05fospetsni( zH00803

23emitesirWCsm6/4/2/1sm677

33oitarthgiewhsad,todgniyekWC 0.4ot5.2/OTUA )1.0fospetsni( otuA24

43oitarthgiewotuagniyekWCesreveRNO/FFOFFO24

53edomyekguBNO/FFOFFO34

63edomBSSniXTWCotuANO/FFOFFO44

73WCotBSSgnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerFNO/FFOFFO44

KSF

83tfihsKSF

zH058/524/002/071

zH07115

93ytiralopgniyekKSFESREVNI/LAMRONlamroN15

04ycneuqerfenotKSFzH5212/5721

zH5212

14MFrofniagciMHGIH/ELDDIM/WOLWOL15

24MFrofedomenot-buSTNOC/TSRUB

eeS ecnerefer egap

34tesfforetaeperotuANO/FFONO33

44enotzH0571:dlohXTNO/FFOFFO43

FMTD

54snoitcnufFMTD sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht 33

A54tcelesyromemrebmunFMTD sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht –

B54rebmunFMTDderotsrofdeepsXTTSAF/WOLStsaF67

C54rebmunFMTDderotsrofnoitarudesuaP /057/005/052/001 sm0002/0051/0001 sm00567

D54lortnocetomerciMelbanENO/FFOFFO

CNT

64CNTlanretnI:dnabBUS/NIAMBUS/NIAMBUS

74CNTlanretnI:deepsrefsnartataDspb0069/0021

spb0021

84dnabgnisnesDCD &NIAM/DNABCNT BUS CNT dnab 05

94edom)enuTretsulCtekcaP(.T.C.PLAUNAM/OTUAlaunaM35

05noitarugifnoctekcaP sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht –

A05htdiwdnabretliftekcaPNO/FFOFFO05

B05tekcaProfleveltupniFA)1fospetsni(9ot0405

C05noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabniaM)1fospetsni(9ot0405

D05noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabbuS)1fospetsni(9ot0405

E05CNTlanretxE;dnabBUS/NIAMBUS/NIAMniaM05

F05CNTlanretxE:deepsrefsnartataDspb0069/0021

spb0021

5 MENU SETUP

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR egaP

syekFP

15tnemngissayekFP sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht

A15yekFPlenaptnorF

/.R.N/.C.B/.N.A/FFO /zHM1/2/1TNA/BN /RLC/LLAC/LRTC /2HC/3HC/ENIF /ENUTWC/1HC /NACS/OFV>M/NI.M /B/A/M/OFV/B=A Q/TILPS/TES-FT PSD/RMQ/NI.M /INOMXR/INOM /1ECIOV/2ECIOV 26-00UNEM

1ecioV

B15yek1FPenohporciMA15saemaSB/A77

C15yek2FPenohporciMA15saemaStilpS77

D15yek3FPenohporciMA15saemaS

M/OFV

E15yek4FPenohporciMA15saemaS XR rotinoM 77

evalS/retsaM noitarepo

25 evals/retsamnirefsnartycneuqerftilpS noitarepo NO/FFOFFO

35 seicneuqerftilpSderrefsnartehtetirwottimreP .sOFVtegratehtot NO/FFOFFO

tibihnIXT45tibihniXTNO/FFOFFO27

tekcaP

55edomnoitacinummoctekcaPNO/FFOFFO

65deepsnoitacinummoctropMOC /00291/0069/0084 spb00675/00483 0069 spb

OPA75noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA(OPA 081/021/06/FFO setunim FFO

0002-CR noitarugifnoC

85edomnoitarepoysaenitnof0002-CR2TNOF/1TNOF1tnoF

95tsartnocyalpsidxirtam-tod/lenap0002-CR)1fospetsni(61ot1857

060002-MRrofedomyalpsiD /EVITAGEN EVITISOP

evitisoP

0002-ST retaepeR snoitcnuF

16noitcnufretaepeR sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht

A16tcelesedomretaepeR /DEKCOL/FFO SSORC FFO

B16dlohXTretaepeRNO/FFOFFO

C16edocDIlortnocetomeR999ot000000

D16 etomerlanretxenilangistnemegdelwonkcA edomlortnoc NO/FFOFFO

E16lortnocetomerlanretxENO/FFOFFO

5 MENU SETUP

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR egaP

ykS +IIdnammoC

26noitarugifnoc+IIdnammoCykS sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht –

A26+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacrednammoC ehtrofngisllacatupnI rednammoC ON LLAC 38

B26+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacretropsnarT ehtrofngisllacatupnI retropsnarT ON LLAC 38

C26ycneuqerfenot+IIdnammoCykSsenotSSCTC83

zH5.88

D26deepsnoitacinummoc+IIdnammoCykSspb0069/0021 spb0021 38

E26edom+IIdnammoCykS /TNEILC/FFO /DNAMMOC RETROP-T FFO38

ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST

noitcnuF uneM .oN

REIFILPMA

dnabTHrofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniLA82

dnabzHM05rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniLB82

zHM441rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnab C82

)044(034rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnabzHM D82

dnabzHG2.1rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniLE82

ANNETNA

rotcennocTNAXRFHmorftupninaelbanE81

RENUTANNETNA

gniviecerelihwTAenil-nI72

gninutehtsetelpmocTAnehwdlohXT62

NOITCNUFPEEB

leveltuptuopeeB21

edomBSSniXTWCotuA63

edomyekguB53

oitarthgiewhsad,todgniyekWC33

emitesirWC23

ycneuqerfenotedisXT/hctipXRWC13

kcabyalprevoytiroirpgniyeK03

oitarthgiewotuagniyekWCesreveR43

REFSNARTATAD

tilpSderrefsnartehtetirwottimreP .sOFVtegratehtotseicneuqerf 35

evals/retsamnirefsnartycneuqerftilpS noitarepo 25

noitcnuF uneM .oN

RETLIFPSD

rezilauqeXRPSD02

rezilauqeXTPSD12

MAroBSSrofhtdiwdnabretlifXTPSD22

FMTD

tcelesyromemrebmunFMTDA54

rebmunFMTDderotsrofnoitarudesuaPC54

rebmunFMTDderotsrofdeepsXTB54

tesfforetaeperotuA34

edomMFrofhcleuqsretem-SelbanEA91

hcleuqsretem-SrofemitgnaHB91

MFrofniagciM14

MFrofedomenot-buS24

enotzH0571:dlohXT44

KSF

ytiralopgniyekKSF93

tfihsKSF83

ycneuqerfenotKSF04

DCL

ssenthgirbyalpsiD00

noitanimulliyeK10

NOITCNUFYROMEM

noitarepotilpsOFV-yromeMA60

lennahcyromem)FFO(dexifro)NO(elbanuT seicneuqerf B60

KCABYALPEGASSEM

kcabyalpehtgnitaeperrofemitlavretnIB92

kcabyalpehttaepeRA92

5 MENU SETUP

noitcnuF uneM .oN

SYEKFP

yekFPlenaptnorFA15

yek1FPenohporciMB15

yek2FPenohporciMC15

yek3FPenohporciMD15

yek4FPenohporciME15

LORTNOCREWOP

gninutrewoptimsnarteniF32

FFO/NOREWOP

noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA(OPA75

LORTNOCETOMER

lortnocetomerciMelbanED54

0002-CRrofedomyalpsiD06

edomnoitarepoysaenitnof0002-CR85

tsartnocyalpsidxirtam-toD/lenap0002-CR95

RETAEPER

etomerlanretxenilangistnemegdelwonkcA edomlortnoc D16

lortnocetomerlanretxEE16

edocDIlortnocetomeRC16

tcelesedomretaepeRA16

dlohXTretaepeRB16

NACS

dlohnacsmargorP90

edomnwodwolshtiwnacsmargorP70

margorPehtrofegnarycneuqerfnwodwolS nacs 80

dohtememusernacS01

egnarnacslausiV11

+IIDNAMMOCYKS

+2dnammoCykSrofngisllacrednammoCA26

deepsnoitacinummoc+IIdnammoCykSD26

edom+IIdnammoCykSE26

ycneuqerfenot+2dnammoCykSC26

+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacretropsnarTB26

REKAEPS

ro2PS.TXErofnoitarugifnoctuptuooiduA enohpdaeh 61

enohpdaehro2PS.TXEroftuptuoesreveR71

noitcnuF uneM .oN

CNT

tekcaProfleveltupniFAB05

deepsnoitacinummoctropMOC65

CNTlanretxE:deepsrefsnartataDF05

CNTlanretnI:deepsrefsnartataD74

dnabgnisnesDCD84

tekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabniaM noitarepo C05

CNTlanretxE;dnabBUS/NIAME05

CNTlanretnI:dnabBUS/NIAM64

edomnoitacinummoctekcaP55

htdiwdnabretliftekcaPA05

edom)enuTretsulCtekcaP(.T.C.P94

noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabbuSD05

LORTNOCNOISSIMSNART

remiTtuo-emiT42

tibihniXT45

RETREVSNART

yalpsidycneuqerfretrevsnarT52

LORTNOCGNINUT

otBSSgnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerFWC 73

ehtrofezispetsycneuqerF HC/ITLUM tsacdaorbMAehtniedomMAroflortnoc dnab 50

ybdegnahcseicneuqerfOFVffosdnuoR ehtgnisu HC/ITLUM lortnoc 40

noituloverrepegnahclortnocgninuT20

htiwgninuT HC/ITLUM lortnoc30

LORTNOCEMULOV

leveltuptuopeeB21

emulovkcabyalp3-URD41

emulovenotedisXT31

emulovkcabyalp3-SV51

BASIC COMMUNICATIONS

SSB TRANSMISSION

SSB is the most commonly-used mode on the HF

Amateur bands. Compared with other voice modes,

SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for

communications. SSB also allows long distance

communications with minimum transmit power.

If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,

beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.

1Select an operating frequency.

2Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to select either lower or

upper sideband mode.

• “LSB” or “USB” appears to show which

sideband is selected.

3Press [MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone

Gain Adjust.

• The current gain level appears.

4Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

• Refer to “VOX” {page 29} for information on

automatic TX/RX switching.

5Speak into the microphone and adjust the

MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects

your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit.

• Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.

Speaking too close to the microphone or too

loudly may increase distortion and reduce

intelligibility at the receiving end.

• You may want to use the Speech Processor.

Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 40}

for details.

6Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to

receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL setting.

7Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain

Adjust.

Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on

page 37, for information on additional useful

operation functions.

FM TRANSMISSION

FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or

UHF frequencies. Many amateur radio operators use

their portable radios and mobile transceivers in FM

mode. You can also utilize repeaters to reach your

friends when they are outside your antenna

coverage. Although FM requires a wider bandwidth

when compared to SSB or AM mode, it has the finest

audio quality among these modes. When combined

with the full-quieting aspect of FM signals, which

suppress background noise on the frequency, FM can

be the best method for maintaining regular schedules

with your local friends.

If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,

beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.

1Select an operating frequency.

2Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.

• “FM” appears.

3Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

• Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on

automatic TX/RX switching.

4Speak into the microphone in your normal tone

and level of voice.

• Speaking too close to the microphone or too

loudly may increase distortion and reduce

intelligibility at the receiving end.

• You can switch the Microphone Gain for FM

between low, medium, and high by using Menu

No. 41. Low is usually appropriate; however,

select high if other stations report that your

modulation is weak. The MULTI/ CH control

has no effect in FM mode.

5Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to

receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL setting.

Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on

page 37, for additional information on useful

operation functions.

6 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS

NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM

When operating in FM mode, you can select wide or

narrow bandwidth operation. The table below shows

the RX IF filter bandwidth and TX deviation

combination for each operating mode. The

bandwidth selection is crucial to avoid audio distortion

or insufficient intelligibility that the other station will

encounter.

1K-type: Main transceiver only.

All E-types: Main transceiver and sub-receiver.

1Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.

2Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the

selection between Wide and Narrow.

• “FM” or “FMN” appears to indicate which

bandwidth is selected.

NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM

When receiving AM on the main transceiver, you can

further decrease the bandwidth to eliminate

interferences. However, the TX deviation of AM is not

affected by this selection.

1Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode on the

main transceiver.

2Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the

selection between Normal and Narrow.

• “AM” or “AMN” appears to indicate which IF

bandwidth is selected for the main transceiver.

AM TRANSMISSION

Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its

own advantages. Although long distance DX

contacts may be less common while using AM, the

superior audio quality characteristic of AM operation

is one reason why some hams prefer this mode.

When looking for others operating on AM, check the

following frequencies first:

3885 kHz, 7290 kHz, 14286 kHz, 21390 kHz, and

29000 ~ 29200 kHz

If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,

beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.

1Select an operating frequency.

2Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode.

• “AM” appears.

3Press [MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone

Gain Adjust.

• The current gain level appears.

4Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

• Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on

automatic TX/RX switching.

5Speak into the microphone and adjust the

MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated power

meter slightly reflects your voice level.

• Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.

Speaking too close to the microphone or too

loudly may increase distortion and reduce

intelligibility at the receiving end.

• You may want to use the Speech Processor.

Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 40}

for details.

6Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to

receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL setting.

7Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain

Adjust.

Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on

page 37, for information on additional useful

operation functions.

Note: If necessary, adjust the carrier level before speaking into the

microphone. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment

mode. While transmitting only carrier signals, turn the MULTI/ CH

control so that the ALC meter just begins to indicate. Press [FUNC],

[MIC/ CAR]

again to complete the adjustment.

edoM retliFFIXR noitaiveDXT

MFediWediW

NMFworraN

worraN

6 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS

CW TRANSMISSION

CW operators know that this mode is very reliable

when communicating under worst conditions. It may

be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being

equally as useful in poor conditions. These modes,

however, do not have the long history of service nor

the simplicity that CW provides.

This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that

supports a variety of functions. For details on using

these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER”

{page 42}.

If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,

beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.

1Select the operating frequency.

2Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

• To precisely tune in another station, use Auto

Zero-beat. Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT”

{below}.

3Press [SEND].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

• Refer to “CW BREAK-IN” {page 42} for

information on automatic TX/ RX switching.

4Begin sending.

• As you transmit, you should hear a sidetone

that lets you monitor your own transmission.

Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH

FREQUENCY” {below}.

5Press [SEND] to return to receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL setting.

Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press

[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. With the key

down, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reads within

the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit. Press

[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR]

again to complete the adjustment.

AUTO ZERO-BEAT

Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting to tune in a

CW station. Auto Zero-beat automatically and exactly

matches your transmit frequency with the station you

are receiving. Neglecting to do this will reduce your

chances of being heard by the other station.

1Press [FUNC], [RIT/ CW TUNE] to start Auto

Zero-beat.

• “CW TUNE” appears.

• Your transmit frequency automatically changes

so that the pitch of the received signal exactly

matches the TX sidetone/ RX pitch frequency

that you have selected. Refer to “TX

SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY” {below}.

• When matching is completed, “CW TUNE”

disappears.

• If matching is unsuccessful, the previous

frequency is restored.

2To quit Auto Zero-beat, press [FUNC],

[RIT/ CW TUNE] or [CLR].

Note:

◆

You cannot start Auto Zero-beat if you have selected 1.0 kHz

or wider for the DSP filter bandwidth.

◆

When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is within

50 Hz in most cases.

◆

Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target

station is too slow or when some interference is present.

◆

When RIT function is ON, only RIT frequencies changes to

make Auto Zero-beat adjustment.

TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY

As you send CW, you will hear tones from the

transceiver speaker. These are called transmit (TX)

sidetones. Listening to these tones, you can monitor

what you are transmitting. You may also use the

tones to ensure that your key contacts are closing,

the keyer is functioning, or to practice sending without

actually putting a signal on the air.

Receive pitch refers to the frequency of CW that you

hear after tuning in a CW station.

On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and

receive pitch are equal and selectable. Access Menu

No. 31 to select the frequency that is most

comfortable for you. The selectable range is from

400 Hz to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz.

To change the volume of the TX sidetone, access

Menu No. 13. The selections range from 1 to 9 and

OFF.

Note: The position of the MAIN AF and SUB AF controls does not

affect the volume of the TX sidetone.

ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION

Usually you can communicate with other stations

using a single frequency for receiving and

transmitting. In this case, you select only one

frequency on either VFO A or VFO B. However, there

are cases where you must select one frequency for

receiving and a different frequency for transmitting.

This requires the use of two VFOs. This is referred to

as “split-frequency operation”. One typical case

which requires this type of operation is when you use

an FM repeater {page 22}. Another typical case is

when you call a rare DX station.

When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, that

operator may immediately get many simultaneous

responses. Often, such a station is lost under the

noise and confusion of many calling stations. If you

find that you are suddenly being called by many

operators, it is your responsibility to control the

situation. You may announce that you will be

“listening up 5 (kHz, from your present transmit

frequency)”, or “listening down between 5 and 10

(kHz)”.

1Press [MAIN], [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B on

the main transceier.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is

selected.

2Select an operating frequency.

• The frequency selected at this point will be

used for transmitting.

• To copy the selected VFO frequency to the

other VFO, press [A=B].

3Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.

4Select an operating frequency.

• The frequency selected on this VFO will be

used for receiving.

5Press [SPLIT].

• “SPLIT” appears.

• Each press of [A/B] reverses the receive and

transmit frequencies.

6To quit split-frequency operation, press [SPLIT]

again.

• “SPLIT” disappears.

If you access Menu No. 06A and select “ON”, you can

recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or

transmitting. For more information, refer to “Memory-

VFO Split Operation” {page 60} under “MEMORY

FEATURES”.

Note: You cannot perform SPLIT operation on the sub-receiver; it

has only one VFO.

TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET)

TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your

transmit frequency and receive frequency. Canceling

this function immediately restores the original

transmit and receive frequencies. By activating TF-

SET, you can listen on your transmit frequency, and

change it while listening. This allows you to check

whether or not the newly selected transmit frequency

is free of interference.

1Configure split-frequency operation as explained

in the previous section.

2Press and hold [TF-SET].

3While holding down [TF-SET], change the

operating frequency by turning the Tuning control

or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].

• The transceiver receives on the frequency that

you select, but the frequency shown on the

sub-display stays unchanged.

4Release [TF-SET].

• You are now receiving again on your original

receive frequency.

Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often

depends on making a well-timed call on a clear

frequency. That is, it is important to select a relatively

clear transmit frequency and to transmit at the exact

instant when the DX station is listening but the

majority of the group aren’t transmitting. Switch your

receive and transmit frequencies by using TF-SET

and listen. You will soon learn the rhythm of the DX

station and the pileup. The more proficient you

become at using this function, the more DX stations

you will contact.

Note:

◆

If you press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to lock the operating

frequency before using TF-SET, pressing an incorrect button

by mistake retains the original receive frequency.

◆

TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.

◆

If you have recalled a memory channel (excluding CH 290 to

299), you cannot change the recalled frequency using the

Tuning control.

◆

To enable the Tuning control, access Menu No. 06B and

select “ON”. Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] after recalling a

memory channel changes the memory channels.

◆

An RIT frequency shift is not added; however, an XIT

frequency shift is added to the transmit frequency.

7 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

FM REPEATER OPERATION

When using FM mode, you may access a repeater to

enjoy long distance communications. Repeaters,

which are often installed and maintained by radio

clubs, are usually located on mountain tops or other

elevated locations. Generally they operate at higher

ERP (Effective Radiated Power) than a typical station.

This combination of elevation and high ERP allows

communications in FM over much greater distances

than FM communications without using repeaters.

Most repeaters use a receive and transmit frequency

pair with an offset. In addition, some repeaters must

receive a tone from the transceiver before it allows

access. Repeaters are available on the 29, 50, 144,

430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands (TS-2000/

TS-B2000 Optional). For further information,

including repeater frequencies, consult your local

repeater reference.

This transceiver provides the following three methods

for programming two separate frequencies:

• Using the Split-Frequency function {page 31}

• Programming an offset (29, 50, 144,

430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz bands)

• Storing in a Split-Frequency channel {page 59}

Note:

◆

When programming two separate frequencies using two VFOs,

be sure to select FM mode on both VFOs.

◆

When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused by

speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal to

“talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.

PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET

When using the 29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz or

1.2 GHz band (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional),

selecting a single frequency and an offset is another

method for programming two separate frequencies.

Unlike the Split-Frequency function, this method

requires only a single VFO.

Note: If you store offset settings in a memory channel, you need not

reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 58}.

29.520 MHz

88.5 Hz

29.520 MHz

88.5 Hz

29.620 MHz

■Selecting an Offset Direction

1Select a receive frequency.

2Press [0/ SHIFT/ OFFSET] to switch the offset

direction.

• Select whether the transmit frequency will

be higher (+) or lower (–) than the receive

frequency.

• “+” or “–” appears to indicate which offset

direction is selected.

• To program –7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or –6.0

MHz (1.2 GHz) offset on all E-types,

repeatedly press [0/ SHIFT/ OFFSET] until

“=” appears.

If the offset transmit frequency falls outside the

allowable range, transmitting is inhibited. Use one

of the following methods to bring the transmit

frequency within the band limits:

• Move the receive frequency further inside the

band.

• Change the offset direction.

Note:

◆

You can only change the offset direction while in FM mode.

◆

While using an odd-split memory channel for transmitting,

you cannot change the offset direction.

■Selecting an Offset Frequency

To access a repeater which requires an odd-split

frequency pair, change the offset frequency from

the default which is used by most repeaters. The

default offset frequencies are as follows.

As for 29 and 50 MHz bands, the default offset is

set to 0 MHz (Simplex). Program the desired

offset frequency for these bands.

1Press [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/ OFFSET].

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the

appropriate offset frequency.

• The selectable range is from 0.00 MHz to

59.95 MHz in steps of 50 kHz.

3Press [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/ OFFSET] again to

complete the setting.

All E-types only: If you have selected “ =” for the offset

direction, you cannot change the default (–7.6 MHz or –6.0 MHz).

dnaB dna.S.U srehtO eporuE

zHM441 ±zHk006

zHM)044(034 ±zHM0.5 ±zHM6.1 zHM6.7-

).tpO(zHG2.1 ±zHM0.21 ±zHM0.53 zHM0.6-

7 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

TRANSMITTING A TONE

Some FM repeaters require the transceiver to

transmit a subaudible tone to prevent other repeaters

on the same frequency from locking each other up.

The required tone frequency differs among repeaters.

Repeaters also differ in their requirements for either

continuous or burst tones. For the appropriate

selections for your accessible repeaters, consult your

local repeater reference.

After completing the tone settings, pressing [SEND]

or pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes the

transceiver to transmit the selected tone. If you have

selected a 1750 Hz tone, press [4/ TONE/ SEL] to

transmit the tone without pressing [PTT].

Note: If you store tone settings in a memory channel, you need not

reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 58}.

■Activating the Tone Function

1Confirm that FM mode has been selected on

the VFO(s).

• When using two VFOs, you must select FM

mode on both VFOs.

2Press [4/ TONE/ SEL] to switch the Tone

function ON (or OFF).

• “T” appears when the function is ON.

Note:

◆

You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS or DCS

functions.

◆

You need to activate the Tone function only when selecting

one of the 38 standard frequencies. The selection you make

here will not affect the transmission of the 1750 Hz tone.

■Selecting a Tone Frequency

1Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/ SEL].

• The current tone frequency appears. The

default is 88.5 Hz.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the

appropriate tone frequency.

• The available tone frequencies are listed in

the following table.

3Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/ SEL] to complete the

setting.

Note:

◆

Use Nos. 01 to 39 shown in the table above when selecting

tone frequencies via Computer Control {page XX}.

◆

You can select a tone frequency independent of a CTCSS

frequency.

■Selecting Continuous or Burst

Access Menu No. 42 to select “Continuous” or

“Burst”. With Continuous selected, the transceiver

sends the tone continuously during the

transmission. With Burst selected, the transceiver

sends a 500 ms tone each time transmission

starts. When using the 144, 430 (440) MHz, or

1.2 GHz band, continuous tones are always

transmitted, regardless of the selection.

■Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone

Most repeaters in Europe require transceivers to

transmit a 1750 Hz tone. With 1750 Hz tone

selected, pressing [4/ TONE/ SEL] causes the

transceiver to transmit the 1750 Hz tone.

Releasing the key ceases transmission of the

code. Some repeaters in Europe must receive

continuous signals for a certain period of time,

following a 1750 Hz tone. This transceiver is

capable of remaining in transmit mode for 2

seconds after transmitting the 1750 Hz tone.

Access Menu No. 44 and select “ON”.

.oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH(

100.76114.79125.631138.291

209.17210.001223.141235.302

304.47315.301322.641337.012

400.77412.701424.151431.812

507.97519.011527.651537.522

605.28618.411622.261636.332

704.58718.811729.761738.142

805.88810.321828.371833.052

905.19913.721929.971930571

018.49028.131032.681

7 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET

This function automatically selects an offset direction,

according to the frequency that you select on the

144 MHz band. The transceiver is programmed for

offset directions as shown below. To obtain an up-to-

date band plan for repeater offset direction, contact

your national Amateur Radio association.

Access Menu No. 43 and switch the function ON or

OFF. The default is ON.

K-type (U.S.A. and Canada versions)

This complies with the standard ARRL band plan.

All E-types (European versions)

Note:

◆

Automatic Repeater Offset does not function when Reverse is

ON. However, pressing [TF-SET] after Automatic Repeater

Offset has selected an offset (split) status, exchanges the receive

and transmit frequencies.

◆

If you change the offset direction by pressing [0/ SHIFT/

OFFSET] when Automatic Repeater Offset is ON, the Shift

direction on the above figure is applied when you change the

frequencies.

REVERSE FUNCTION

After programming an offset on the 29, 50, 144, 430

(440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz (Optional) band, the reverse

function exchanges a separate receive and transmit

frequency. So, while using a repeater, you can

manually check the strength of a signal that you

receive directly from the other station. If the station’s

signal is strong, both stations should move to a

simplex frequency to free up the repeater.

Press [TF-SET] to switch the Reverse function ON

(or OFF) while the Shift function is active.

• “R” appears when the Reverse function is ON.

Note:

◆

If pressing [TF-SET] places the transmit frequency outside the

allowable range, pressing Mic [PTT] will cause an error beep to

sound; transmission will be inhibited.

◆

If pressing [TF-SET] places the receive frequency outside the

allowable range, an error beep will sound and reversal will not

occur.

◆

Automatic Repeater Offset does not function while Reverse is

ON.

◆

You cannot switch Reverse ON or OFF while transmitting.

+−

−− +S

144.0 145.5 146.4 147.0 147.6

145.1 146.0 146.6 147.4 148.0 MHz

S: Simplex

–

144.0 146.0 MHz145.8145.6

AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)

ASC functions only when you have programmed an

offset on the 29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz or 1.2 GHz

(Optional) band. While using a repeater, ASC

periodically monitors the strength of a signal that you

receive directly from the other station. If the station’s

signal is strong enough to allow direct contact without

a repeater, the ASC indicator on the display starts

blinking.

Press and hold [TF-SET] for approximately 1 second

to switch the function ON.

• The [R] indicator appears when the function is ON.

• When direct contact is possible, the [R] indicator

blinks.

• To quit the function, press [TF-SET].

Note:

◆

Pressing Mic [PTT] causes the ASC indicator to stop blinking.

◆

ASC does not function if your transmit and receive frequencies

are the same (simplex operation).

◆

ASC does not function while scanning.

◆

Activating ASC while using Reverse switches Reverse OFF.

◆

If you recall a memory channel or the Call channel that has the

Reverse status ON, ASC is switched OFF.

◆

ASC causes received audio to be momentarily intermitted every

3 seconds.

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN

This function scans through all tone frequencies to

identify the incoming tone frequency on a received

signal. You can use this function to find which tone

frequency is required by your local repeater.

1Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/ SEL].

• The current tone frequency appears.

2Press [SCAN/ SG. SEL] to activate the Tone

Freq. ID.

•When the tone frequency is identified, the

identified frequency appears and blinks.

• Press [SCAN/ SG. SEL] while the identified

frequency is blinking, to resume scanning.

• Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/ SEL] again to quit

the function.

7 ENHANCED COMMUNICATONS

FM CTCSS OPERATION

You may sometimes want to hear calls only from

specific persons. When using FM mode, the

Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS)

allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls from

other persons who are using the same frequency. A

CTCSS tone is subaudible and is selectable from

among the 38 standard tone frequencies. Select the

same CTCSS tone as the other stations in your

group. You will not hear calls from stations other than

those using the same CTCSS tone.

Note: CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private. It

only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is

selected.

2Select a band.

3Select an operating frequency.

4Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.

• “FM” appears.

5Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.

6Press [6/ CTCSS/ SEL] to switch the CTCSS

function ON (or OFF).

• “CT” appears when the function is ON.

7Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/ SEL].

• The current CTCSS frequency appears. The

default CTCSS frequency is 88.5 Hz.

8Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the

appropriate CTCSS frequency.

• The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in

the following table.

9Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/ SEL] to complete the

setting.

You will hear calls only when the selected tone is

received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press

and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.

Skip steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed

the appropriate CTCSS frequency.

Note:

◆

When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode on

both VFOs to use CTCSS.

◆

Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table above when selecting

CTCSS frequencies via Computer Control {page XX}.

◆

You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone

frequency.

◆

You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone or DCS

functions.

CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN

This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to

identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received

signal. You may find this useful when you cannot

recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in

your group are using.

1Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/ SEL].

• The current CTCSS frequency appears.

2Press [SCAN/ SG. SEL] to activate the CTCSS

Freq. ID scan.

•“C T” blinks and every CTCSS tone frequency

is scanned. When the CTCSS frequency is

identified, the transceiver stops scanning and

the identified frequency is displayed.

• Press [SCAN/ SG. SEL] to resume scanning.

• Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/ SEL] to quit the

scanning.

Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.

.oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH(

100.76114.79125.631138.291

209.17210.001223.141235.302

304.47315.301322.641337.012

400.77412.701424.151431.812

507.97519.011527.651537.522

605.28618.411622.261636.332

704.58718.811729.761738.142

805.88810.321828.371833.052

905.19913.721929.971

018.49028.131032.681

7 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

FM DCS OPERATION

Digital Code Squelch (DCS) is another FM

application which allows you to ignore (not hear)

unwanted calls. It functions the same way as

CTCSS. The only differences are the encode/

decode method and the number of selectable codes.

For DCS, you can select from 104 different codes

listed in the table below.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is

selected.

2Select a band.

3Select an operating frequency.

4Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.

• “FM” appears.

5Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.

6Press [•/ DCS/SEL] to switch the DCS function

ON (or OFF).

• “DCS” appears when the function is ON.

7Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL].

• The current DCS code appears and blinks.

The default is 023.

8Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the

appropriate DCS code.

• The available DCS codes are listed in the

following table.

9Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL] again to complete

the setting.

320560231502552133314564216137

520170431212162233324664426237

620270341322362343134305726437

130370541522562643234605136347

230470251622662153544615236457

630411551342172653644325456

340511651442472463254625266

740611261542603563454235466

150221561642113173554645307

350521271152513114264565217

450131471252523214464606327

You will hear calls only when the selected code is

received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press

and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.

Skip steps 7 to 9 if you have already programmed the

appropriate DCS code.

Note: You cannot use DCS with the Tone or CTCSS functions.

DCS CODE ID SCAN

This function scans through all DCS codes to identify

the incoming DCS code on a received signal. You

may find this useful when you cannot recall the DCS

code that the other persons in your group are using.

1Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL].

• The current DCS code appears.

2Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the DCS Code

ID scan.

•“DCS” blinks and every DCS code is scanned.

When the DCS code is identified, the

transceiver stops scanning and the identified

DCS ID is displayed.

• Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to resume scanning.

• Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL] to quit scanning.

Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.

COMMUNICATING AIDS

RECEIVING

SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY

In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing

Mic [UP]/[DWN], there are several other ways to

select your frequency. This section describes

additional methods of frequency selection that may

save your time and effort.

■Direct Frequency Entry

When the desired frequency is far removed from

the current frequency, directly entering a

frequency from the numeric keypad is usually the

fastest method.

1Press [ENT].

• “- - - . - - - . - - ” appears.

2Press the numeric keys ([0] to [9]) to enter

your desired frequency.

• Pressing [ENT] fills the remaining digits (the

digits you did not enter) with 0 and

completes entry.

• To select 1.85 MHz for example, press [0],

[0], [0], [1], [8], [5], then press [ENT] to

complete the input (7 key strokes).

• To shorten the key strokes, you can also

use [•] as MHz. Press [1], [•] (MHz), [8],

[5], then press [ENT] to complete the input

(5 key strokes).

• Pressing [CLR] cancels the entry and

restores the current VFO frequency.

Note:

◆

You can enter the frequency in the range of 30.00 kHz to

1299.99999 MHz.

◆

Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the

selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound.

The entered frequency is rejected.

◆

When the entered frequency does not meet the current

VFO frequency step size requirement, the nearest

available frequency is automatically selected (Sub-

receiver). The nearest available frequency is

automatically selected after the entered frequency is

changed (Main transceiver).

◆

When the 10 Hz digit (last displayed digit) is entered, the

digit 0 is automatically entered for the 1 Hz digit, and

frequency entry is completed. The 1 Hz digit is not

displayed.

◆

When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT or XIT will be

switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT offset frequency is not

cleared.

◆

After recalling memory channels 290 to 299 that have

Start and End frequencies stored, the receive frequency

can be changed by using Direct Frequency Entry within

the programmed range.

■Using 1 MHz Steps

Pressing [+]/ [–] on the front panel changes

Amateur bands. You can also use the MULTI/ CH

control to change the operating frequency in steps

of 1 MHz.

1Press [1MHz/ SEL].

• “MHz” appears.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control.

• Clockwise increases the frequency, counter-

clockwise decreases the frequency.

3Press [1MHz/ SEL] to exit the function.

• “MHz” disappears.

If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of

100 kHz or 500 kHz steps rather than 1 MHz,

press [FUNC], [1MHz/ SEL] then turn the

MULTI/ CH control to select 100 kHz or 500 kHz.

Note: Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is selected for the [1MHz] key,

the MHz icon appears.

■Quick QSY

To move up or down the frequency quickly, use the

MULTI/ CH control. Turning this control changes

the operating frequency in steps of 5 kHz for SSB/

CW/ FSK and 10 kHz for FM/ AM (below 60 MHz).

• If you want to change the default frequency

step size, press [FUNC], [9/ FINE/ STEP].

Select 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,

15 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz or

100 kHz for FM/ AM, and 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,

5 kHz, or 10 kHz for the other modes. The

default step size is 5 kHz for SSB/ CW/ FSK/

AM and 10 kHz for FM (below 60 MHz).

• When changing the operating frequency by

using the MULTI/ CH control, frequencies are

rounded such that new frequencies are

multiples of the frequency step size. To cancel

this function, access Menu No. 04 and select

OFF (default is ON).

• Within the AM broadcast band, the step size

automatically defaults to the frequency step

value in Menu No. 5. This step size can be

switched between 9 kHz (ON) and 5 kHz (OFF)

via Menu No. 05.

Note: The programmed frequency step size for the MULTI/ CH

control is stored independently for the HF/ 50 MHz, 144 MHz,

430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz bands (Main transceiver). You can

also set a different frequency step size for SSB/ CW/ FSK, AM,

and FM modes. The sub-receiver also stores the independent

frequency step size for 118 MHz (K-type only), 144 MHz,

300MHz (K-type only), and 430 (440) MHz bands. You can also

set a different frequency step size for FM and AM.

8 COMMUNICATING AIDS

■Fine Tuning

The default step value when turning the Tuning

control to change the frequency is 10 Hz for SSB,

CW, and FSK modes, and 100 Hz for FM and AM

modes. However, you can change the step size to

1 Hz for SSB, CW, and FSK modes, and 10 Hz for

FM and AM modes.

1Press [FINE].

• “FINE” appears.

2Turn the Tuning control to select the exact

frequency.

3To quit the function, press [9/ FINE/ STEP]

again.

• “FINE” disappears.

Note:

◆

Fine Tuning works only on the main transceiver.

◆

If Menu No. 03 is ON, you cannot perform fine tuning in FM

mode for all bands and AM mode for the 144 MHz/ 430

(440) MHz/ 1.2 GHz (Optional) bands.

■Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B)

This function allows you to copy the frequency and

modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive

VFO.

1Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or

VFO B.

2Press [A=B].

• The frequency and mode selected in step 1

are copied to the inactive VFO.

3Press [A/B] to confirm that the frequency was

copied.

RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)

RIT provides the ability to change your receive

frequency by ±20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without

changing your transmit frequency. If the Fine Tuning

([FINE/ STEP]) function is ON, the step size becomes

1 Hz. RIT works equally well with all modulation

modes and while using VFO or Memory Recall mode.

1Press [RIT].

•“RIT” and the RIT offset appear.

2If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the RIT offset

to 0.

3Turn the RIT/ SUB control to change your receive

frequency.

4To turn off RIT, press [RIT/ CW TUNE].

• The receive frequency is returned to the

frequency that was selected prior to step 1.

Note:

◆

RIT works only on the main transceiver.

◆

When storing the frequency in Memory channel with RIT function

ON, RIT offset frequency is added or subtracted to/ from the VFO

frequency. Then the calculated data is stored in the Memory

channel.

AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)

When using a mode other than FM, AGC selects the

time constant for the automatic gain control circuit.

Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver

gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large

input changes. A fast time constant causes the

receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to

changes in the input signal. A fast AGC setting is

particularly useful in the following situations:

• Tuning rapidly

• Receiving weak signals

• Receiving high-speed CW

Unlike other transceivers, the TS-2000’s digital AGC

circuit allows you to adjust the time constant from

slow to fast in 20 steps, where 1 is the slowest and

20 is the fastest. Furthermore, you can switch the

AGC OFF if you desire.

For your convenience, the following default AGC time

constant has already been programmed.

SSB: Level 7 CW: Level 12

FSK: Level 14 AM: Level 5

To change the default time constant:

1Press [8/ AGC/OFF].

• The AGC time constant scale appears on the

sub dot-matrix display.

2To select a slower time constant, turn the

MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise. The bar

indicator moves from F(ast) to S(low). To select a

faster time constant, turn the MULTI/ CH control

clockwise. The bar indicator moves from S(low) to

F(ast).

3If you want to turn the AGC OFF, press [FUNC],

[8/ AGC/OFF].

Note: You cannot adjust the AGC time constant on the sub-receiver.

8 COMMUNICATING AIDS

TRANSMITTING

VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT)

VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching

to the transmit mode each time you want to transmit.

The transceiver automatically switches to transmit

mode when the VOX circuitry senses that you have

begun speaking into the microphone.

When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing

between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop

back to receive mode briefly. You will then hear if

anybody wants to interrupt, plus you will have a short

period to gather your thoughts before speaking again.

Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as

well as respect your more articulate conversation.

VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for

CW and the other modes, excluding FSK.

Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to toggle VOX ON and OFF.

• The VOX LED lights.

■Microphone Input Level

To enjoy the VOX function, take the time to

properly adjust the gain of the VOX circuit. This

level controls the capability of the VOX circuit to

detect the presence or absence of your voice. In

CW mode, this level cannot be adjusted.

1Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.

2Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the VOX

function ON.

• The VOX LED lights.

3Press [FUNC], [VOX/ LEVEL].

• The current VOX gain appears on the sub

dot-matrix display.

4 While speaking into the microphone using your

normal tone of voice, adjust the setting (default

is 4) using the MULTI/ CH control until the

transceiver reliably switches to transmit mode

each time you speak.

• The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9.

• The setting should not allow background

noise to switch the transceiver to transmit

mode.

Note: The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is

switched OFF or while you are transmitting.

■Delay Time

If the transceiver returns to receive mode too

quickly after you stop speaking, your final word

may not be transmitted. To avoid this, select an

appropriate delay time that allows all of your

words to be transmitted without an overly long

delay after you stop speaking.

1Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.

2Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the VOX

function ON.

3Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY].

• The current setting appears on the sub dot-

matrix display. The default is 50.

4While speaking into the microphone using your

normal tone of voice, adjust the MULTI/ CH

control such that the transceiver switches to

receive mode after you have stopped talking.

• The selectable range is from 5 to 100

(150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5, or OFF.

5Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] to set the VOX

delay.

8 COMMUNICATING AIDS

SPEECH PROCESSOR

The Speech Processor levels out large fluctuations in

your voice while you speak. When using SSB, FM, or

AM mode, this leveling action effectively raises the

average transmit output power, resulting in a more

understandable signal. The amount of voice

compression is fully adjustable. You will notice that

using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be

heard by distant stations.

1Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.

2Press [PROC/ LEVEL] to switch the Speech

Processor ON.

• The PROC LED lights.

3Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to enter the

Speech Processor input level adjustment mode.

4As you speak into the microphone, turn the

MULTI/ CH control so that the compression meter

indicates that the compression level is around 10

dB while you speak.

• Using higher compression will not improve your

signal clarity or apparent signal strength.

Excessively compressed signals are more

difficult to understand due to distortion and are

less pleasant to hear than signals with less

compression.

5Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to exit the Speech

Processor input level adjustment.

6Press [MIC/ CAR] to enter the Microphone Gain

Adjustment.

• As you speak into the microphone, turn the

MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter

reflects accroding to your voice level but does

not exceed the ALC limit. Press [MIC/ CAR] to

exit when you finish the adjustment.

Transmit power

Time

Speech

Processor

OFF

Speech

Processor

XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING)

Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your

transmit frequency by ±20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz

without changing your receive frequency. If the Fine

Tuning ([FINE]) function is ON, the step size is 1 Hz.

1Press [XIT/ ALT].

• “XIT” and the XIT offset appear.

2If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the XIT offset

to 0.

3Turn the RIT/ SUB control to change your transmit

frequency.

4To turn XIT OFF, press [XIT/ ALT].

• The transmit frequency is returned to the

frequency that was selected prior to step 1.

Note:

◆

XIT works only on the main transceiver.

◆

The frequency shift set by the RIT/ SUB control is also used by

the RIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XIT offset

also affects the RIT offset.

◆

When XIT frequency exceeds the limit of the amateur radio band,

the transceiver automatically stops transmitting.

8 COMMUNICATING AIDS

TRANSMIT INHIBIT

Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being

placed in transmit mode. No signal can be

transmitted and receiver audio is muted with this

function is ON even if the PTT or [SEND] is pressed.

• TX Inhibit OFF: Transmission is allowed.

• TX Inhibit ON: Transmission is not allowed.

Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. 54. The

default is OFF.

CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING

Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually

an unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with

other stations. However, if necessary, by using the

Tuning control you can change the operating

frequency while transmitting. You also can change

the XIT offset frequency while in transmit mode.

While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside

the transmit frequency range, the transceiver is

automatically forced to receive mode. If you selected

transmit mode by pressing [SEND], transmission will

not resume until you select a frequency inside the

transmit frequency range, at which time you must

press [SEND] again.

CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL

CHARACTERISTICS

The quality of your transmitted signal is important,

regardless of which on-air activity you pursue.

However, it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact

since you don’t listen to your own signal. The

following sub-sections provide information that will

help you tailor your transmitted signal.

■Changing Transmit Bandwidth (SSB/AM)

Use Menu No. 22 to select one of the following

transmit bandwidths: 2.0 kHz, 2.2 kHz, 2.4 kHz

(default), 2.6 kHz, 2.8 kHz, or 3.0 kHz.

1: If the Speech Processor is ON, the low-cut filter is set to

200 Hz for 2.8 kHz and 3.0 kHz.

■Equalizing Transmit Audio (SSB/FM/AM)

Use Menu No. 14 to change the transmit

frequency characteristics of your signal. You can

select from one of six different transmit profiles

including the default flat response. Selecting any

of the following items from the Menu causes “TX

EQ.” to appear on the display.

• Off:

The default frequency response for SSB, FM,

and AM.

• High boost:

Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective

for a bassy voice.

• Formant pass:

Improves clarity by suppressing audio

frequencies outside the normal voice frequency

range.

• Bass boost:

Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective

for a voice with more high frequency

components.

• Conventional:

Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz

and higher.

• User:

Reserved for future use. Off is programmed at

the factory as a default.

Frequency Response Curves

0.2 0.7 2.2

Amplitude

Audio

frequency

(kHz)

Bass boost

High boost

Off

Conventional

Formant pass

htdiwdnaB ycneuqerfdnabssaP

zHk0.2zH0052-005

zHk2.2zH0062-004

zHk4.2zH0072-003

zHk6.2zH0082-002

zHk8.2zH0092-001

zHk0.3zH0003-01

8 COMMUNICATING AIDS

CW BREAK-IN

Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually

switching between transmit and receive modes. Two

types of Break-ins are available: Semi Break-in and

Full Break-in.

Semi Break-in:

When the key contacts open, the transceiver

automatically waits for the passage of the time period

that you have selected. The transceiver then returns

to receive mode.

Full Break-in:

As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver

returns to receive mode.

USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2Press [VOX/ LEVEL].

• The VOX LED lights.

3Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY].

• The current setting (Full or delay time)

appears. The default is Full Break-in.

4Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Full Break-in

or a delay time for Semi Break-in.

• Delay time ranges from 5 to 100 (50 ms to

1000 ms) in steps of 5.

5Begin sending.

•The transceiver automatically switches to

transmit mode.

• When FBK (Full Break-in) is selected: The

transceiver immediately switches to receive

mode when the key opens.

• When a delay time is selected: The

transceiver switches to receive mode after the

delay time that you have selected has passed.

6Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] again.

Note: Full Break-in cannot be used with the TL-922/922A linear

amplifier.

ELECTRONIC KEYER

This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that

can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the

transceiver’s rear panel. Refer to “Keys and

Keyboards for CW Operation” {page 3} for details

regarding this connection. The built-in keyer supports

lambic operation.

CHANGING KEYING SPEED

The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully

adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is

important in order to send error-free CW that other

operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is

beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes.

You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed

that is close to the speed used by the other station.

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2Press [KEY/ DELAY].

• The current keying speed appears. The default

is 20 (WPM).

3While keying the paddle and listening to the

transmit sidetone, turn the MULTI/ CH control to

select the appropriate speed.

• The speeds range from 10 (WPM) to 60

(WPM), in steps of 1. The larger the number,

the faster the speed.

4Press [KEY/ DELAY] again to complete the

setting.

Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function, the

selected speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.

AUTO WEIGHTING

The electronic keyer can automatically change the

dot/dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash

length to dot length. The weighting changes with

your keying speed, thus making your keying easier

for other operators to copy.

Use Menu No. 33 to switch Auto Weighting ON or

OFF. The default is ON. When Auto Weighting is

OFF, the weighting is locked as 1:3.0 regardless of

the keying speed.

■Reverse Keying Weight Ratio

Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you

increase your keying speed. However, the

electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting

as you increase your keying speed.

To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 34,

and select ON. The default is OFF.

esreveR gniyeK thgieW

)MPW(deepSgniyeK

52~01 54~62 06~64

FFO5.2:10.3:12.3:1

NO2.3:10.3:18.2:1

8 COMMUNICATING AIDS

BUG KEY FUNCTION

The built-in electronic keyer also can be used as a

semi-automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also

known as “Bugs”. When this function is ON, dots are

generated in the normal manner by the electronic

keyer. Dashes, however, are manually generated by

the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for

the appropriate length of time.

To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 35, and

select ON. The default is OFF.

Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory

(see below) cannot be used.

CW MESSAGE MEMORY

This transceiver has three memory channels for

storing CW messages. Each memory channel can

store approximately 50 characters. These memory

channels are ideal for storing contest exchanges that

you want to send repeatedly. Stored messages can

be played back to check message content or for

transmitting.

The electronic keyer has a function that allows you to

interrupt playback and manually inject your own

keying. To switch this function ON, access Menu No.

30, and select ON. The default is OFF.

The electronic keyer can also repeatedly play back

the message that you stored. To switch this function

ON, access Menu No. 23 and select ON. The default

is OFF.

For repetitive message playback, you can change the

interval between each series of messages. Use

Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the range of 0

to 60 seconds.

Note:

◆

This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is

ON.

◆

Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No. 30 OFF cancels

message playback. Even if message playback does not stop

because of your keying start timing, you can cancel playback

by pressing [CLR].

■Storing CW Messages

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL].

• The VOX LED turns off.

3Press [FUNC] and [1/ CH 1/REC],

[2/ CH 2/REC], or [3/ CH 3/REC] to select a

memory channel to be recorded.

4Begin sending using the keyer paddle.

• The message you send is stored in memory.

5To complete the message storage, press

[CLR] to stop.

• When the memory becomes full, recording

automatically stops.

Note: If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting to

record a message, a pause is stored in the channel.

■Checking CW Messages without Transmitting

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch it

OFF.

3Press [1/ CH 1/REC], [2/ CH 2/REC], or

[3/ CH 3/REV] to select the channel to be

played back.

• The message is played back.

• To play back the messages stored in the

other channels in sequence, press the

corresponding channel keys during

playback. Up to three channels can be

queued at the same time.

• While playing back the messages, you can

also adjust the keyer speed by pressing

[KEY/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI/ CH

control.

• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].

■Transmitting CW Messages

Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break-

in/ Full Break-in or manual TX/RX switching.

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2To use Semi Break-in/ Full Break-in, press

[VOX/ LEVEL]. The VOX LED lights.

Otherwise, press [SEND].

3Press [1/ CH 1/REC], [2/ CH 2/REC], or

[3/ CH 3/REC] to select the channel to be

played back.

• The message is played back and

transmitted automatically.

• To transmit the messages stored in the

other channels in sequence, press the

corresponding channel keys during

playback. Up to three channels can be

queued at the same time.

8 COMMUNICATING AIDS

• While playing back the messages, you can

also adjust the keyer speed by pressing

[KEY/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI/ CH

control.

• To interrupt transmission, press [CLR].

4If you pressed [SEND] in step 2, press [SEND]

again to return to receive mode.

■Changing the Inter-message Interval Time

For the message playback repeat, select Menu

No. 29A and set it ON. You can also change the

interval playback time of the message. Use Menu

No. 29B, and select the time in the range of 0 to

60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.

Note: The Menu 29A and 29B settings are shared with the voice

communication modes when the optional DRU-3A is installed.

■Changing the Sidetone Volume

Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not

change the CW sidetone playback volume. To

change the CW sidetone volume, access Menu

No. 13 and OFF, or 1 to 9.

■Insert Keying

If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing

back a recorded CW message, the transceiver

stops playing back the message. However, during

contests or regular QSOs, you may sometimes

want to insert a different number or message at a

certain point in the recorded message.

In this case, first record the CW message as usual

{page 43}, without the number or message you

want to insert. Then, access Menu No. 30 and

select ON.

Now if you operate a CW keyer while you play

back a recorded message, the transceiver pauses

the playback of the recorded message, instead of

stopping it. When you finish sending the number

or message with the keyer, the transceiver

resumes playback of the message.

FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW

If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you would

sometimes use SSB mode (USB or LSB) just to

watch and listen CW signals. It is fine just to monitor

those CW signals but you have experienced that

changing the mode from SSB to CW results losing

the target CW signal. This is because the frequency

on the display always shows the true carrier

frequency for all modes. If you want the transceiver

to shift the receiving frequency to trace the receiving

CW signal when changing the mode from SSB (USB

or LSB) to CW, switch this function ON. The

transceiver shifts the receiving frequency when

changing the mode from SSB to CW. So, you can

still hear the target signal and instantly trasmit the

signal in CW, without adjusting the frequency.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 37.

2Press [+] to select ON.

3Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the

Menu mode.

AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE

If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you can

configure the transceiver to change the operating

mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW and then

transmit in CW mode when you operate the CW

keyers.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 36.

2Press [+] to select ON.

3Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the

Menu mode.

Note: You must switch the break-in function ON to change the

mode and transmit in CW mode {Page 42}.

SUB-RECEIVER

The TS-2000 transceiver is equipped with 2

independent receivers. The main transceiver can

receive from 30 kHz to the UHF band (or 1.2 GHz

band if the optional UT-XX is installed) while the sub-

receiver can receive signals in FM or AM mode on

the VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440MHz) band.

You can assign the sub receiver to monitor the local

repeater activities or your club channel while you are

operating on the HF/ 50MHz or VHF/ UHF/ (Optional

1.2 GHz) bands with the main tranceiver.

Since the TS-2000 also has a built-in TNC, you can

assign the sub-receiver to monitor the local DX

PacketCluster channel activities without using an

external TNC. If a new DX station is reported to the

DX Packet Cluster, the transceiver automatically

displays the DX station data. If desired, you can

further transfer the DX frequency information to the

main tranceiver to watch and instantly make contact

with the DX station {page 53}.

TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND

In this manual, the frequency on the left of the display

is referred to as the MAIN band and the frequency on

the right is called the SUB band.

To understand how to control the MAIN band and

SUB band frequencies and functions, please note the

differences between the TX band and the Control

band, below.

TX BAND

Press [MAIN] to display “PTT” and “CTRL” icons on

the MAIN band. When “PTT” is on the MAIN band

display, the MAIN band is currently selected as the

transmission band. You can use the MAIN band

frequency to transmit signals or to control the main

transceiver functions.

If you press [SUB], the “PTT” and “CTRL” icons move

to the SUB band display. This means that the SUB

band is now selected as the transmission band and

controls the functions. You can use the SUB band

frequency to transmit signals or control the sub

receiver functions.

CONTROL BAND

On some occasions, you may need to adjust the

frequency and/ or functions for the band you are not

transmitting on. To do this, press [CTRL]. For

example, if both “PTT” and “CTRL” are on the MAIN

band display, pressing [CTRL] will move “CTRL” to

the SUB band display. “PTT” remains on the MAIN

band display. This allows you to continue transmitting

on the MAIN band while you adjust the functions of

the sub-receiver.

RECEIVING

ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER

Press the SUB AF control to switch the sub-receiver

ON or OFF. The orange LED above the SUB AF/

SQL control lights when the sub-receiver is switched

ON.

Note: When switching ON or OFF the sub-receiver, you may hear a

poping sound from the speaker. This is not a malfunction.

CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER

To control all the available functions of the sub-

receiver, press [SUB] to transfer the controls and

transmission capability to the sub-receiver. The PTT

and CTRL icons move from the main transceiver to

the sub-receiver. When you press [SEND] or the

microphone PTT switch, the transceiver transmits on

the SUB band frequency.

Or, if you would like to trasmit and receive on the

MAIN band while adjusting the sub receiver functions,

simply press [CTRL]. Only the CTRL icon moves

from the main transceiver display to the sub display.

The “PTT” icon remains on the main transceiver

display. With this setup, you can continue receiving

and transmitting on the main transceiver VFO

frequency(ies) while you are making adjustments to

the sub-receiver functions.

If you need to adjust only the frequency of the sub-

receiver, you can simply turn the RIT/ SUB control.

However, this works only when you are operating the

main transceiver without the RIT/ XIT functions.

When operating the main transceiver with the RIT/

XIT function, first, switch OFF the RIT/ XIT function

by pressing [RIT/ CW TUNE] and/or [XIT/ ALT], or

press [CTRL] to move the controls to the SUB band.

Then turn the MAIN control, the MULTI/ CH control or

the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the SUB band

frequency.

SELECTING A BAND

Press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign the function

controls to the sub-receiver.

Press [+] or [–] to select the 144 MHz or the 430

(440) MHz band.

The “PTT” and “CTRL” icons are both on the sub-

receiver display:

• You can do all the above, plus transmit on the

SUB band frequency.

This transceiver provides many other methods for

selecting a frequency quickly. For further details,

refer to “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY” {page

37}.

SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER

The multifunction meter measures the parameters

described in the table below. The S-meter appears

when in receive mode and the PWR meter appears

when in transmit mode. Peak readings for the S-

meter and PWR functions are held for momentarily.

Note: Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.

SELECTING A MODE FOR THE SUB-RECEIVER

First, confirm that the “CTRL” icon is on the SUB

band display. If it is not, press [SUB] or [CTRL] to

assign the function controls to the SUB band.

The SUB band can only be used to transmit in FM

mode and receive in FM or AM mode. Press [FM/

AM/ NAR] to toggle the operating mode for the sub-

receiver. The narrow bandwidth operation for FM or

AM is not available for the SUB band frequency.

FM CTCSS OPERATION

You can assign an independent CTCSS tone to the

sub-receiver. Refer to FM CTCSS OPERATION

{page 35} for function and control details.

FM DCS OPERATION

You can assign an independent DCS code to the sub-

receiver. Refer to FM DCS OPERATION {page 36}

for function and control details.

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN

This function scans through all the tone frequencies

in order to identify the incoming tone frequency on

the receiving signal of the sub-receiver. Refer to

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN {page 34} for function and

control details.

DCS CODE ID SCAN

This function scans through all the DCS codes in

order to identify the incoming DCS code on the

receiving signal of sub-receiver. Refer to DCS CODE

ID SCAN {page 36} for function and control details.

ATTENUATOR

The attenuator reduces the level of received signals.

It is useful when there is strong interference from an

adjacent frequency. Since the main transceiver and

sub-receiver share the same antenna for the

• Holding down the button changes the bands

continuously.

•If “MHz” is visible on the display, first press

[1MHz] to exit from the 1MHz Step Up/ Down

mode.

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN

Turn the SUB AF control clockwise to increase the

audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the

level.

<TS-2000/ DIAGRAM 46-02>

Note: The position of the SUB AF control does not affect the volume

of beeps caused by pressing buttons. The audio level for Packet

operation is also independent of the SUB AF control setting.

ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH

Turn the SUB SQL control clockwise when no signals

are present, to select the squelch level at which

background noise is just eliminated. The SUB band

LED turns off when the squelch is ON.

SELECTING A FREQUENCY

When you operate both the main transceiver and the

sub-receiver at the same time, you will be in one of

the following conditions. First, check where the “PTT”

and “CTRL” icons are, on the display, then follow the

instructions below.

The “PTT” and “CTRL” icons are both on the MAIN

band display:

• Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the sub-

receiver frequency.

“PTT” is on the SUB band display and “CTRL” is on

the MAIN band display:

• Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the sub-

receiver frequency.

“PTT” is on the MAIN band display and “CTRL” is on

the SUB band display:

• Turn the RIT/ SUB control, the MULTI/ CH control,

or the MAIN control to adjust the frequency. Or,

directly enter the frequency using the numeric

keypad {page XX}. However, the input frequency

must be within the sub-receiver frequency range.

The frequency you selected may round up to the

nearest workable frequency step size {page XX}.

You cannot transmit on the sub-band frequency.

4 SUB-RECEIVER

elacS yalpsiD etatSnoitcnuF

ShtgnertslangisdevieceRevieceR

RWPrewoptuptuotimsnarTtimsnarT

4 SUB-RECEIVER

144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz bands, activating the

attenuator function for the sub-receiver also causes

the function to switch ON for the same band of the

main transceiver.

PRE-AMPLIFIER

The pre-amplifier amplifies the level of received

signals. It is useful when the receiving signal is

weak. If there is no strong interference from adjacent

frequencies, switch the pre-amplifier ON to raise the

receiving signal level. Since the main transceiver and

sub-receiver share the same antenna for the

144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz bands, activating the

pre-amplifier function for the sub-receiver also causes

the function to switch ON for the same band of the

main transceiver.

DUAL WATCH

If different frequency bands are set on the main

transceiver and sub-receiver, you can still monitor the

other band activities while transmitting on the TX

band. It is useful that you can still monitor the local

repeater frequency (VHF or UHF band) while you are

working on a DX station on the HF band of the main

transceiver.

If you have the same frequency band (VHF or UHF

band) for the main transceiver and sub-receiver, you

can monitor both frequencies independently at the

same time. However, both receivers will temporarily

mute when you transmit, because the transceiver

shares the same 144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz band

antenna between the main transceiver and sub-

receiver.

SCAN

All types of scanning are also available for the sub-

receiver. However, the operating frequency range is

limited to the sub-receiver’s frequency coverage.

Refer to “SCAN” {page 66} for details on how to

operate the scan function.

NOISE REDUCTION

Since the sub-receiver can receive only in FM or AM

mode, DSP noise reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) is

available to reduce the noise from the receiving

singals. Refer to “REJECTING INTERFACE” {page

56} for details on how to control and adjust the

function.

TRANSMITTING

First, confirm that the “PTT” icon is on the SUB band

display. Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT],

then speak into the microphone in your normal tone

of voice. When you finish speaking, press [SEND]

again or release Mic [PTT].

SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER

You can also adjust the output power for FM mode in

the 144 and 430 (440) MHz bands when you are

operating the sub-receiver.

1Press [PWR].

• The current transmit power appears.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise to

reduce the power or clockwise to increase the

power.

Note:

◆

The selectable range varies depending on the current band and

mode {page 20}.

◆

Output power configuration is also reflected in the main

transceiver.

MICROPHONE GAIN

Access Menu No. 41 and select “L” (low), “M”

(medium), or “H” (high).

Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode,

select high microphone gain. Microphone sensitivity is low in FM

mode; this may cause insufficient modulation. For other

microphones, select “M” (medium) or “L” (low).

FM REPEATER OPERATION

You can also configure an independent repeater

offset frequency for the sub-receiver, if necessary.

Refer to “FM REPEATER OPERATION” {page 32} for

details.

REVERSE FUNCTION

Press [TF-SET] to switch the sub-receiver Reverse

function ON (or OFF). “R” appears while the Reverse

function is active on the sub-receiver.

Refer to “REVERSE FUNCTION” {page 34} for

details.

AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)

You can also use ASC functions on the 144 MHz and

430 (440) MHz bands of the sub-receiver. While

using a repeater, ASC periodically monitors the

strength of the uplink frequency to check the signals.

Press and hold [TF-SET] until “[R]” appears on the

SUB band display.

Refer to “AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK” {page 34}

for function and control details.

TRANSMITTING A TONE

You can assign another Tone to the sub-receiver.

Refer to “TRANSMITTING A TONE” {page 33} for

function and control details.

MEMORY

You can also utilize all the memory functions

{page 58}, including Quick Memory {page 64}, while

you are operating the sub-receiver. However, the

operating frequency range is limited to the sub-

receiver’s frequency coverage. You cannot recall any

memory channels that are outside the the sub-

receiver’s frequency coverage. These channels are

automatically skipped when they are recalled on the

sub-receiver.

SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

PACKET RADIO

Packet is a unit of data transmitted as a whole from

one computer to another, on a network. Packets can

be transmitted on radio waves as well as on

communications lines. Besides a transceiver and a

computer, all you need is a terminal node controller

(TNC) or Multimode Communications Processor

(MCP). One of the tasks of TNCs and MCPs is to

convert data packets to audio tones, and vice versa.

This transceiver has a built-in TNC which allows you

to use basic (not full) packet applications.

A variety of packet applications developed by hams

include packet bulletin board systems (PBBSs).

PBBSs are created and maintained by volunteers

called System Operators (SysOp). You may access

one of your local PBBSs to send e-mail, download

files, or obtain various useful information. Thousands

of PBBSs, which have formed a worldwide network,

relay e-mail to their intended destinations around the

world.

When you access a local PBBS for the first time, you

often need to register as a new user. After you are

successfully registered, it will then be available as

your home PBBS. E-mail addressed to you will be

held under a directory, called a mailbox, on your

home PBBS.

To send e-mail, you must designate the address of a

recipient, using his or her call sign and the call sign of

his or her home PBBS; ex. KD6NUH@KJ6HC. In this

example, the e-mail is addressed to KD6NUH whose

home PBBS is KJ6HC. If your home PBBS cannot

find KJ6HC in its address file to forward your mail,

you must designate the address in more detail. You

may enter “KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA”, or

“KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA”, or up to

“KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA.NA”, as

necessary. The complete address of a recipient living

in the U.S.A., for example, should include an

appropriate region code (preceded by a #), state,

country, and continent abbreviations, as above.

For further information, consult reference books

which should be available at any store that handles

Amateur Radio equipment. Web pages relating to

Packet will also be helpful. On Internet search

engines, use “Packet Radio” as key words to find

those Web pages.

Note:

◆

Unlike a TNC, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP)

serves as a communications interface in several digital modes

such as Packet, RTTY, and AMTOR. You can cause it to switch

among the modes by sending a single command from your

computer.

◆

If there is an amateur radio club in your area, consider becoming

a member. You can often learn more in an hour from

experienced hobbyists, than in a month of independent research.

Ask on the local repeaters, or contact your national amateur radio

organization (the ARRL in the U.S.A.) for information on local

amateur radio clubs. You’ll be glad you did.

BUILT-IN TNC

This transceiver has a built-in TNC which conforms to

the AX.25 protocol. This protocol is used for

communication between TNCs. The TNC accepts data

from your personal computer and assembles it into

packets. It then converts those packets to audio tones

which the transceiver can transmit. The TNC also takes

audio tones from the transceiver, converts them to data

for the computer, and checks for errors in the data.

In order to activate the built-in TNC, access Menu

No. 55 and select ON. The defulat is OFF. “TNC” will

appear to show that the built-in TNC is ON.

The TNC mainly functions in Command or Converse

mode. First, you should learn the difference between

these two modes.

•Command mode

When you select Packet mode, the TNC enters

Command mode. A “cmd:” prompt appears on the

computer screen. You can type commands from

the computer keyboard to change the settings of

the TNC. When in Converse mode, press

[Ctrl]+[C] on the keyboard to return to Command

mode.

•Converse mode

The TNC enters this mode when a link with the

target station is established. On the computer

keyboard, type an appropriate command and a

message if necessary, then press [Enter] or

[Return]. What you type is converted into packets

and transmitted over the air. When in Command

mode, type CONVERSE, CONV, or K to enter

Converse mode.

For the commands supported by the built-in TNC, see

“TNC COMMANDS LIST” on page XX.

Note:

◆

Not all functions available via conventional TNCs are supported

by the TNC built in this transceiver.

◆

The built-in TNC automatically reinitiates when a malfunction is

detected; this does not designate that the transceiver is defective.

PBBS

7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

PREPARATION

1Connect the transceiver to your personal

computer (via an external TNC or MCP if desired).

• See “COMPUTER” {page XX} and “MCP AND

TNC” {page XX}.

2Install an appropriate terminal program onto the

personal computer.

• A variety of freeware and shareware programs

can be obtained in various ways. Consult your

reference material or other “packeteers”.

3Initiate the terminal program and set the following

parameters on the personal computer:

• Transfer rate (TNC/MCP <–> Computer):

9600 bps

• Data length: 8 bit

• Stop bit: 1 bit

• Parity: Non

• Flow control: Hardware

4Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

5Access Menu No. 46 and select the main band or

the sub-band (default) as the data band.

• “TNC” appears on the data band.

• If you are using an external TNC or MCP,

access Menu No. 50E to make this selection.

The default is main band.

6Access Menu No. 47 and select 1200 bps (default)

or 9600 bps as the transfer rate between TNCs.

• You must select the same transfer rate as the

target station.

• If using an external TNC or MCP, access Menu

No. 50F to make this selection. The default is

1200 bps.

7Select an operating frequency.

8Press [LSB/USB] or [FM/AM] to select LSB, USB,

or FM mode.

9Access Menu No. 50A and select ON to activate

the packet filter.

10 Turn the LO/ WIDTH control to select the narrow

or wide filter bandwidth.

• “NAR” or “WID” appears to indicate the current

selection.

If you are using an external TNC or MCP, proceed

with the subsequent steps.

11 Following the instructions provided with your TNC

or MCP, enter the calibration mode so that you

can generate a mark condition.

• “RX” disappears and “TX” appears.

12 Access Menu No. 50B to select the appropriate AF

input level.

• Select a low input level, so long as the ALC

meter reflects.

13 Exit the calibration mode.

• “TX” disappears and “RX” appears.

14 Access Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate

AF output level.

• You cannot use the AF control to make this

adjustment.

• If you have selected sub-band in step 5,

access Menu No. 50D instead.

The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used

for Packet are listed below:

DCD SENSE

You can also select the method for inhibiting the built-

in TNC from transmitting. Access Menu No. 48 and

select one of the two methods. The default is “TNC

BAND”.

TNC BAND:

The TNC does not transmit when signals are present

on the TNC (data) band.

MAIN&SUB:

The TNC does not transmit when signals are present

on the main band or sub-band.

adanaC/.A.S.U )acirfA/eporuE(1noigeRURA

0381~0081—

5363~02630063~0953

0017~0807—

05101~04101—

5.99041~5904121141~10141,99041~98041

01181~50181—

00112~0901202112~00112

98182~0218200392~00292,05182~02182

08705~00605—

090541~019441???

570144~579044)???-<(520134~050034

dnaB edoM refsnarT etaR retliF htdiwdnaB

zHM05/FH BSU/BSL spb003???

spb0021???

MFspb0021???

ro(034/441 zHM)044 MF spb0021???

spb0069???

7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY)

RTTY is the data communications mode with the

longest history. It was originally designed for use with

mechanical teletypewriters which were often used

before personal computers become common. Now

you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal

computer and MCP. Unlike Packet, each time you

type a letter, it is transmitted over the air. What you

typed is transmitted and displayed on the computer

screen of the recipient.

RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK)

and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to

transmit information.

For the cable connections, see “RTTY” {page XX}.

For further information, consult reference books

about Amateur Radio.

1Access Menu No. 38 and select an FSK shift.

• FSK shift is the difference in frequencies

between a mark and a space.

• The 170 Hz default is used on the Amateur

bands.

2Access Menu No. 39 and select a key-down

polarity.

• Select “NORMAL” to transmit a mark when

keying down or “INVERS” to transmit a space.

The default is “NORMAL”.

3Access Menu No. 40 and select high tone

(2125 Hz) or low tone (1275 Hz) for mark.

• High tone (default) is commonly used

nowadays.

4Select an operating frequency.

5Press [CW/FSK] to select FSK.

• “FSK” appears.

6If necessary to be compatible with the other

station, press [FUNC], [CW/FSK] to reverse the

transceiver to the upper sideband.

• “FSR” appears.

• Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for

FSK operation.

• Press [FUNC], [CW/FSK] to return to the lower

sideband.

7Following the instructions provided with your MCP,

enter a command from your computer to select

transmit mode.

• The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX)

to red (TX).

• You may instead press [SEND] to manually

select the transmit mode.

8Begin sending data from your computer.

• Use Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate AF

output level. The AF control cannot be used

for this adjustment.

• Press [FUNC], [TX MONI] to monitor your

signals. Press [FUNC], [TX MONI] again to

quit this function.

9When finished transmitting, enter a command from

your computer to return to receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX)

to red (TX).

• If you pressed [SEND] in step 7, press [SEND]

again.

The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used

for RTTY operation are listed below:

Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press

[FUNC], [MIC] to enter the adjustment mode. With a key down

condition, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reads in

the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit.

adanaC/.A.S.U 1noigeRURA )acirfA/eporuE(

0481~00812481~8381

)0953:XD(5463~50630263~0853

)0407:XD(0017~08075407~5307

05101~0410105101~04101

5.99041~070415.99041~08041

01181~0018190181~10181

00112~0701202112~08012

03942~0294292942~02922

05182~0708205182~05082

7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

AMTOR/ PacTOR/ CLOVER/ G-TOR/ PSK31

Besides Packet and RTTY, digital modes which have

been used among hams include AMTOR, PacTOR,

CLOVER, G-TOR, and PSK31. This manual does not

describe much about these modes. For details,

consult reference books about Amateur Radio.

AMTOR (AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio) has

brought amateur HF digital communication into the

computer age. It is the first error-free HF digital mode

by which data bursts (not steady stream of data) are

transmitted.

PacTOR (Packet Teleprinting On Radio) has

combined the best features of both AMTOR and

Packet to improve the efficiency of HF digital

communications. Like Packet and AMTOR, PacTOR

sends error-free data using a handshaking method.

Of all the Amateur Radio HF digital modes, CLOVER

offers the best overall performance using a

complicated modulation technique, automatic power

adjustment and other advanced features. It may

allow communications to be maintained under the

worst conditions.

G-TOR (Golay-coded Teleprinting Over Radio) is

relatively new Amateur Radio digital mode currently in

use. G-TOR was developed specifically to handle the

adverse conditions of communicating, across the

solar system, with spacecraft during their missions.

PSK31 is developed by an RTTY enthusiast in the

Great Britain, G3PLX. The operating technique is

very similar to the conventional Baudot-RTTY,

although a more sensitive fine-tuning is required, as a

PSK31 signal requires a tuning accuracy of a few

Herts. A specialty of PSK31 is that it allows the entire

ASC II character set, including the back space

character.

Your MCP should handle some or all of the above

modes. For available modes on your MCP, consult

the instruction manual for the MCP. For the cable

connections, see “MCP AND TNC” {page XX}.

On most HF bands, audio frequency shift keying

(AFSK) is used for the above modes. This method of

modulation uses audio tones therefore either LSB or

USB mode should be selected. Traditionally, LSB is

used, similar to RTTY, with the exception of AMTOR

which is normally operated in USB.

AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 and

3637.5 kHz. These are also good starting places

when searching for PacTOR, Clover, G-TOR, or

PSK31 stations.

Note: When using SSB mode for digital operation, use a fast

AGC setting and switch your Speech Processor OFF.

SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE

Slow-scan Television (SSTV) is a popular application

for transmitting still images over the air, from one

station to another. Instead of trying to describe your

station, simply showing it is much faster. Transmitting

images over the air requires a scan converter,

besides a transceiver. A scan converter transforms

images taken with a video camera into audio signals

that can be fed into your transceiver. The recipient’s

scan converter transforms audio signals back into

video images so that he or she can view them on a

TV set.

Nowadays instead of a scan converter, many hams

use a personal computer, a software application, and

an interface attached to the transceiver. This is much

cheaper, more flexible, and does not require a TV set.

In recent years, many low cost digital cameras have

become available. You can transfer images from

these cameras into your computer.

For further information, consult reference books

about Amateur Radio. The frequencies (measured in

kHz) commonly used for SSTV operation are listed

below:

Fax (facsimile) is one of the original image

transmission modes. Using this mode allows you to

exchange more detailed graphics than SSTV.

Amateur Radio fax functions much like old analog fax

systems. It scans paper and converts acquired

image data into a series of tones representing white

and black portions of the image. Because fax

requires longer transmission time, you should use it

only when band conditions are stable with strong

signals.

Popular fax frequencies include the following:

• 7245, 14245, 21345 (International Net), and

28945 kHz

Operating on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning

the functionality of your computer application or

accessory hardware that supports these modes.

Consult the instruction manual that comes with your

software or accessory equipment.

Note: When operating either SSTV or fax, use a fast AGC setting

and switch OFF your Speech Processor, for best results.

adanaC/.A.S.U 1noigeRURA )acirfA/eporuE(

7583,54830473~0373

17175407~5307

33241,0324153241~52241

0431254312~53312

0868258682~57682

005541???

7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE

DX PacketCluster is a packet network which consist

of nodes and stations who are interested in DXing

and contesting. If one station finds a DX station on

the air, he or she sends a notice to his or her node.

This node then passes the information to all its local

stations as well as another node. This transceiver

can display received DX information and hold the

latest information on up to 10 DX stations.

This transceiver is also capable of automatically

tuning in a reported DX station. In order to use the

Auto Tune function, access Menu No. 49A and select

AUTO; the default is MANUAL.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

2Press [SUB] to activate the sub-band receiver.

3The SUB band LED lights orange.

4Tune to the frequency of the target DX

PacketCluster node on the sub-receiver.

5Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] to enter the

PacktClusters Monitor mode.

• Each time new DX PacketCluster data is

received, an alarm sounds and the information

is displayed on the sub-band as shown below:

• Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] again to exit this

mode.

6If you are using the Auto Tune function, press

[SET/ P.C.T.].

• The main band is tuned to the frequency of the

reported DX station, on the sub-band.

• Transmitting on the tuned frequency

deactivates the Auto Tune. Press [SET/ P.C.T.]

again to reactivate it, if necessary.

To access desired DX information from memory,

press QUICK MEMO [MR], then turn the MULTI/ CH

control. Press [SET/ P.C.T.] to tune the main band to

the selected station. Press QUICK MEMO [MR]

again to quit the DX information display.

The transceiver can be set to output a Morse code

instead of a beep when new DX PacketCluster data is

received. Access Menu No. 49B and select MORSE.

VOICE or OFF can also be set.

Note:

◆

You cannot send DX information to a node using this function.

◆

The DX information in memory is cleared when the transceiver

power is turned OFF.

Node

Station

SATELLITE OPERATION

It was in December of 1961 when the first Amateur

satellite named OSCAR I was launched. OSCAR

stands for Orbiting Satellite Carrying Amateur Radio.

Since then quite a few of Amateur satellites have

been launched, and about 20 satellites are currently

in orbit serving thousands of hams throughout the

world.

Some Amateur satellites contain transponders that

receive analog signals in one band, amplify them,

shift their frequencies to another band, and retransmit

them. You can enjoy communications in SSB or CW

with other stations via these analog satellites. Most

of them are orbiting at relatively low altitudes and are

called LEOs (Low Earth Orbit).

Amateur satellites receive (uplink) on one band and

transmit (downlink) on another. Different

combinations of uplink and downlink bands are

represented by modes such as A, B, and K. For

example, a Mode K satellite receives on the 21 MHz

band and transmits on the 29 MHz band. This

transceiver can handle the modes listed in the table.

In order to work the satellites, you need a rotator that

allows azimuth and elevation control, plus a high-gain

directional antenna. Your antenna has to track

satellites which travel from horizon to horizon.

However, many hams have been successfully using

fixed omnidirectional antennas. If you are using a

directional antenna, it would be wise to obtain a pass

prediction program.

Doppler Shift is another aspect that you must take

into account when working the satellites. As a target

satellite travels away, frequencies on which you will

receive change. This transceiver has a function that

automatically keeps the sum or difference between

the two frequencies identical when you change the

receive frequency.

For further information, consult Internet Web pages

relating to Amateur satellites. On Internet search

engines, use “AMSAT” as key words to find those

Web pages. AMSAT (Radio Amateur Satellite

Corporation) is the world wide organization of

Amateur Satellite operators and supporters. From

AMSAT Web pages, you can also download a variety

of utilities, including pass prediction programs, which

will ease your satellite operations.

edoM dnaBknilpU dnaBknilnwoD

AzHM441zHM92

BzHM)044(034zHM441

AJzHM441zHM)044(034

KzHM12zHM92

TzHM12zHM441

7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

1Press [SATL] to select Satellite mode.

• The default downlink (435.9 MHz) and uplink

(145.9 MHz) frequencies appear.

• “TRACE”, “R”, and “SATL” appear to indicate

the current selections.

2On VFO A, tune to the downlink frequency of the

satellite.

3Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [CW/ FSK/ REV] to

select LSB, USB, or CW mode.

4Press [A/B] to select VFO B.

5Tune to the uplink frequency of the satellite.

6Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [CW/ FSK/ REV] to

select LSB, USB, or CW mode.

7If you are using a directional antenna, adjust its

azimuth and elevation.

• If you have a pass prediction program, you can

use it to identify the exact location of the

satellite.

• If you are using a fixed omnidirectional

antenna, skip this step.

8With time, fine tune to the changing downlink

frequency of the satellite using the Tuning control.

• As you adjust the downlink frequency, the

Trace function automatically changes the uplink

frequency so that the sum of the two

frequencies is kept the same.

• If necessary, press [A=B] to quit the Trace

function. “TRACE” disappears.

• The trace function can also change the uplink

frequency so that the difference between the

two frequencies is kept the same. Press

[SPLIT]. “R” disappears.

You can also store all the above selections in up to 10

memory channels. Press [M.IN], then turn the

MULTI/ CH control to select a channel from 0 to 9.

Press [M.IN] again to store the selection in the

channel. To recall the desired channel after storing,

rotate the MULTI/ CH control while in Satellite mode.

In order to use the MULTI/ CH control to change the

frequency when in Satellite mode, press [VFO/ M].

The MULTI/ CH LED turns off.

4To return the display to the current operating

mode, press [DISP/ SEL].

Note:

◆

The cut-off frequencies can be adjusted independently for

each operating mode. When you change the operating

mode, the previous setting is recalled for each operating

mode.

◆

When the Packet filter (Menu No. 50A) is ON, you cannot

change the DSP filter bandwidth. Switch the Packet filter

OFF to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth.

■CW/ FSK Modes

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW or FSK

mode.

2Press [DISP/ SEL].

• The current filter selection appears.

3Turn the LO/ WIDTH control clockwise to

increase (wide) the bandwidth, or

counterclockwise to decrease (narrow) the

bandwidth.

4As for CW, you can further adjust the shift

frequency for passband. Turn the HI/ SHIFT

control to adjust the shift frequency from 400 to

1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz. The default shift

frequency is 800 Hz.

5To return the display to the current operating

mode, press [DISP/ SEL].

REJECTING INTERFERENCE

DSP FILTERS

KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP)

technology is used for the functions described in this

section. Using DSP filtering, the TS-2000 frees you

from installing many analog filters for each operating

mode. Additionally, you can control the bandwidth,

cancel the multiple jamming beat, and reduce the

noise level using DSP filtering technology.

CHANGING THE RECEIVE BANDWIDTH

For improving interference reduction capability, this

transceiver also provides IF filters designed using

DSP technology. When in SSB, FM, or AM mode,

you can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low

and/or high cut-off frequency. For CW and FSK

modes, you can change the filter bandwidth by

directly specifying a bandwidth. Changing the filter

bandwidth does not affect the current receive

frequency.

Note:

◆

The receive filter bandwidth can be changed only on the main

transceiver.

◆

AF DSP filter is used for FM mode.

■SSB/ FM/ AM Modes

1Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.

2Press [DISP/ SEL].

• The current filter selection appears.

3Turn the LO/ WIDTH control clockwise to raise

the low cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise

to lower the low cut-off frequency.

Turn the HI/ SHIFT control clockwise to raise

the high cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise

to lower the high cut-off frequency.

Interfering

signal Desired

signal Interfering

signal

tsujdA )zH(snoitceleSycneuqerF

HTDIW/OL ,004,003,002,001,05,0 ,009,008,007,006,005 0001

TFIHS/IH ,0002,0081,0061,0041 ,0082,0062,0042,0022 0005,0004,0043,0003

edoM )zH(snoitceleShtdiwdnaB tluafeD )zH(

WC ,004,003,002,051,001,08,05 0002,0001,006,005 006

KSF0051,0001,005,0520051

edoM tuc-woltluafeD )zH(yceuqerf tuc-hgihtluafeD )zH(ycneuqerf

MF/BSS0030062

MA0010005

LO/WIDTH

HI/SHIFT

Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL], then turn the

MANUAL BC control to select the single Beat

Cancel frequency manually. You can select the

beat cancel frequency from approx. 230 Hz to

3300 Hz by turning the control. Turn the control

clockwise to select a higher frequency and

counterclockwise to select a lower frequency.

•Since the DSP Automatic Beat Cancel processes

the incoming signals at the AF stage, strong beat

signals may affect the AGC level. In this case,

use the Auto Notch Filter instead, to remove the

beat signal from the IF passband filter.

Note: While receiving intermittent CW signals, the transceiver

clicks. This is not a malfunction.

NOISE REDUCTION

(N.R.1: ALL MODES, N.R.2: SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM)

This transceiver provides two types of Noise

Reduction functions (1 and 2) for reducing random

noise which interferes with the desired signal. Trying

them both is the easiest way to judge which function

works more effectively under the current conditions.

Normally, select Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enchanced)

in SSB mode and Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC) in CW

mode.

Press [N.R./ LEVEL] to toggle between Noise

Reduction 1, Noise Reduction 2, and OFF.

• “N. R. 1” or “N.R. 2” appears, depending on which

function is selected.

■Setting the N.R. 1 Level Adjustment

The Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enchanced Method)

uses an adaptive filter to reduce the noise element

from the received signals. When the S/N ratio is

reasonably goo in SSB, using N.R.1 will improve

the S/N further.

While the N.R. 1 is ON, you can further adjust the

noise reduction level by pressing [FUNC],

[N.R./ LEVEL], then turn MULTI/ CH control to

select the level from 1 to 10 or AUTO. The default

is AUTO.

■Setting the N.R. 2 Time Constant

You can change the correlation time for Noise

Reduction 2 (SPAC). When in SSB mode, select

the correlation time that allows you to hear signals

with more clarity. When receiving CW, it is best to

select the longest correlation time that allows

reliable reception. The longer the correlation time,

the better the S/N ratio.

When Noise Reduction 2 is ON, press [FUNC],

[N.R./ LEVEL], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

select the correlation time from 2 ms to 20 ms.

The default is 20 ms.

Note:

◆

Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the clarity

of signals or induce pulse noise, depending on the

conditions.

◆

Only N.R. 1 is available for the sub-receiver. However, the

level cannot be adjusted.

9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE

NOTCH FILTER (SSB)

Auto Notch filter automatically locates and attenuates

any single interfering tone within the receive pass

band. This function operates digitally at the IF filter

level, hence it can affect your S-meter reading and

may also affect (slightly attenuate) your desired

signal. However, controlling the AGC level by

notching out the strong interfering beat signals could

bring up the desired SSB signal that is covered by the

interfering beat signal. If the interfering tone is weak,

you may find that Beat Cancel eliminates them more

effectively.

Press [A.N./ LEVEL] to toggle the Auto Notch Filter

ON and OFF.

•“A.N.” appears when the function is ON.

•The interfering beat signals are notched out.

If the interfering beat signals change the tone

frequency randomly, you can adjust the Auto Notch

level.

Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] to access the Auto

Notch level adjustment, then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select the level from 0 to 5. Level 1 is the

slowest beat tone tracking speed and Level 5 is the

fastest. Level 0 terminates the beat tone tracking.

BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM)

Beat Cancel uses an adaptive filter and attenuates

more than one cyclic interference within the receive

pass band. The adaptive filter changes its

characteristics according to the nature of the signal

being received at any given moment. You can use

automatic Beat Cancel when in SSB or AM mode.

Press [B.C./ MANUAL] to toggle the Auto Beat

Cancel ON and OFF.

•“B. C.” appears when the function is ON.

•If desired, you can manually control the beat

cancel frequency.

Before

Interfering

tones

After

Receive pass band

Desired

signal

Before

Interfering

tones

After

Receive pass band

Desired

signal

ATTENUATOR

The Attenuator reduces the level of received signals.

This function is useful when there is strong

interference from adjacent frequencies.

Press [ATT/ F LOCK] to toggle the Attenuator ON

and OFF.

• “ATT” appears when the function is ON.

The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in

the current band. Each time you select the same

frequency band, the attenuator setting will be

automatically recalled.

The frequency range of each band is available below.

Note: If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz) band is

selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the

attenuator can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This is

because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same

antenna.

9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE

NOISE BLANKER

Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise

such as that generated by automobile ignitions.

Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode.

Press [NB/ LEVEL] to toggle the Noise Blanker ON

and OFF.

• “NB” appears when the function is ON.

You can further adjust the Noise blanker level from 1

to 10. The default level is 6.

Press [FUNC], [NB/ LEVEL], then turn the

MULTI/ CH control to adjust the noise blanker level.

• “NB LEVEL” and the current level appear on the

sub dot-matrix display.

Note: Noise Blanker is available only for the main transceiver in

SSB, CW, FSK, and AM modes.

PRE-AMPLIFIER

Switching the Pre-amplifier OFF may help reduce

interference from adjacent frequencies.

Press [PRE/ LOCK A] to toggle the Pre-amplifier ON

and OFF.

• “PRE” appears when the function is ON.

The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in

the current band. Each time you select the same

band, the same setting will be automatically selected.

The frequency range of each band is provided in the

following table (under “ATTENUATOR”).

Note: If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz) band

is selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the

pre-amplifier can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This

is because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same

antenna.

sdnaBycneuqerF )zHM( reifilpma-erP )tluafeD( rotaunettA )tluafeD(

5.2~30.0FFOFFO

1.4~5.2FFOFFO

5.7~1.4FFOFFO

5.01~5.7NOFFO

5.41~5.01NOFFO

5.81~5.41NOFFO

5.12~5.81NOFFO

5.52~5.12NOFFO

0.03~5.52NOFFO

0.06~0.03NOFFO

003~811NOFFO

215~003NOFFO

0031~0421NOsyawlA syawlA FFO

MEMORY CHANNELS

The TS-2000 provides you with 300 memory

channels, numbered 00 to 299, for storing operating

frequency data, modes and other information.

Memory channels 00 to 289 are called Conventional

Memory Channels. Memory channels 290 to 299 are

designed for programming VFO tuning ranges and

scan ranges. The data you can store is listed below:

Conventional memory is used for storing data you will

often recall. For example, you may store the

frequency where you regularly meet your club

members.

1 Changing the data after recalling a memory channel

overwrites the contents of the channel.

retemaraP lennahC 982~00 lennahC 992~092

ycneuqerfXRseY seY

)xelpmis(

ycneuqerfXTseY

edomXRseY seY

)xelpmis(

edomXTseY

seicneuqerfdnE/tratSoNseY

ycneuqerftesffOseYseY

noitceridtfihSseYseY

edomesreveRseYseY

ezispetsycneuqerfXRseY seY )xelpmis(

ezispetsycneuqerfXTseY

ycneuqerfenoTseYseY

ycneuqerfSSCTCseYseY

edocSCDseYseY

edomSCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO seYseY

emanyromeMseYseY

tuokcoLlennahCyromeM FFO/NO seY

seY

MEMORY FEATURES

STORING DATA IN MEMORY

There are 2 methods used for storing transmit/receive

frequencies and associated data in memory channels

00 to 289. Use either method, depending on the

relationship of the receive and transmit frequencies

you store:

• Simplex channels:

RX frequency = TX frequency

• Split-frequency channels:

RX frequency ≠ TX frequency

Memory channels 290 to 299 can also be used as

simplex channels.

Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the frequency that includes the RIT

or XIT offset will be stored.

■Simplex Channels

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

•“t A” or “t B” appears to show which VFO

is selected.

2Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.

3Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the

storage process, press [CLR].

4Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]

or [DWN] to select a memory channel.

• You can also select a channel by entering a

3-digit number, such as 012, using the

numeric keys.

5Press [M.IN] again to store the data.

• The previous data stored in the channel is

overwritten.

10 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL

There are two modes which allow you to retrieve

frequencies and associated data that you stored in a

memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.

Memory Recall:

In this mode, the transceiver receives and transmits

using a frequency that you retrieve. You can

temporarily change the frequency and associated

data without overwriting the contents of the memory

channel when Menu No. 06B is set to ON.

Memory Scroll:

Use this mode to check the contents of the memory

channels without changing the current receive

frequency. In this mode, frequencies you retrieve are

not used for receiving and transmitting.

■Memory Recall

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

• The memory channel that was last selected

appears.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]

or [DWN] to select a memory channel.

• Continuously holding down Mic [UP] or

[DWN] steps the transceiver through the

memory channels until the key is released.

• Memory channels which contain no data are

skipped.

• You cannot change memory channels while

transmitting.

3To exit Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M].

Note: Memory channels can also be changed while using the

TF-SET function.

■Split-Frequency Channels

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO

is selected.

2Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.

• This frequency and mode will be used for

transmitting.

3Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.

4Select the receive frequency and mode.

5Press [SPLIT].

• “SPLIT” appears.

6Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the

storage process, press [CLR].

7Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]

or [DWN] to select a memory channel.

• You can also select a channel by entering a

3-digit number, such as 012, using the

numeric keys.

8Press [M.IN] again to store the data.

•The previous data stored in the channel is

overwritten.

Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX

while performing memory-VFO split operation, the subtone

frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel.

10 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION

Under “SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING”

{page XX}, you learned about split-frequency

operation using two VFOs. Recalling a split-

frequency channel is another way to perform split-

frequency operation. If you access Menu No. 07

and select ON, you can also use a memory

channel and a VFO together for this operation, as

follows:

• RX: Memory channel

TX: VFO A or VFO B

• RX: VFO A or VFO B

TX: Memory channel

To use a memory channel for receiving:

1Access Menu No. 06A and select ON.

2Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use

for transmitting.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO

is selected.

3Select the frequency for transmitting.

4Recall a memory channel by pressing

[VFO/M].

5Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a memory

channel to receive.

6Press [SPLIT].

7The VFO A frequency appears on the sub

display. If you want to use the VFO B

frequency to transmit, press [SPLIT] again.

8Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the

frequency shown on the sub display.

9Press [SPLIT] to exit the SPLIT operation.

• If Split operation is still selected using VFO

A or VFO B, press [SPLIT] again to exit

Split operation.

To use a memory channel for transmitting:

1Access Menu No. 06A and select ON.

2Recall a memory channel by pressing

[VFO/M].

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a memory

channel to transmit.

4Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode .

5Press [SPLIT]. The other VFO frequency

appears on the sub display for transmission

(Normal SPLIT operation).

6Press [SPLIT] again. The memory channel

you selected in step 3 appears on the sub

display for transmission.

7Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the

frequency in the memory channel.

8Press [SPLIT] to exit SPLIT operation.

■Memory Scroll

1Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

•The memory channel that was last selected

appears.

<TS-2000/Diagram 60-01>

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]

or [DWN] to step through the memory

channels.

• You can also change channels by entering a

3-digit number, such as 012, using the

numeric keys, then pressing [ENT].

3To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].

• The transceiver re-displays the memory

channel or VFO frequency that was

selected before you activated Memory

Scroll.

Note: Do not press [M.IN] again after entering Memory Scroll

mode. Pressing [M.IN] results in over-writing the current VFO

data to the memory channel you selected.

■Temporary Frequency Changes

After retrieving frequencies and associated data in

Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change

the data without overwriting the contents of the

memory channel.

1Access Menu No. 06B and select ON.

• Skip this step when changing only the

associated data (not the frequency).

2Recall a memory channel.

3Change the frequencies and associated data.

• Use only the Tuning control to select a

frequency.

4If necessary for future use, store the changed

data in another memory channel. Refer to

“Channel ➡ Channel Transfer” {page 61}.

Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using

the TF-SET function.

10 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY TRANSFER

■Memory ➡ VFO Transfer

After retrieving frequencies and associated data

from Memory Recall mode, you can copy the data

to the VFO. This function is useful, for example,

when the frequency you want to monitor is near

the frequency stored in a memory channel.

1Recall the desired memory channel.

2Press [Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL].

• When a simplex channel is recalled, the

data is copied to VFO A or VFO B,

depending on which VFO was used to recall

the channel.

• When a split channel is recalled, the RX

data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is

copied to VFO B.

Note:

◆

The Memory Channel Lockout status and the subtone

frequency are not copied.

◆

Pressing [M

VFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing

the retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO.

■Channel ➡ Channel Transfer

You can also copy channel information from one

memory channel to another. This function is

useful when storing frequencies and associated

data that you temporarily change in Memory

Recall mode.

1Recall the desired memory channel.

2Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

• To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].

3Select the memory channel where you would

like the data copied, using the MULTI/ CH

control.

4Press [M.IN] again.

982~00lennahC a982~00lennahC

ycneuqerfXR aycneuqerfXR

ycneuqerfXT aycneuqerfXT

XRrofedoM aXRrofedoM

XTrofedoM aXTrofedoM

ycneuqerftesffO aycneuqerftesffO

noitceridtfihS anoitceridtfihS

FFO/NOesreveR aFFO/NOesreveR

petsycneuqerfXR apetsycneuqerfXR

petsycneuqerfXT apetsycneuqerfXT

ycneuqerfenoT aycneuqerfenoT

ycneuqerfSSCTC aycneuqerfSSCTC

edocSCD aedocSCD

SCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO aSCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO

emaNyromeM aemaNyromeM

lennahCyromeM FFO/NOtuokcoL alennahCyromeM FFOtuokcoL

982~00lennahC a992~092lennahC

ycneuqerfXR aycneuqerfXR/XT )xelpmis(

ycneuqerfXT a

XRrofedoM aXR/XTrofedoM )xelpmis(

XTrofedoM a

ycneuqerftesffO aycneuqerftesffO

noitceridtfihS anoitceridtfihS

FFO/NOesreveR aFFO/NOesreveR

petsycneuqerfXR aycneuqerfXR/XT )xelpmis(pets

petsycneuqerfXT a

ycneuqerfenoT aycneuqerfenoT

ycneuqerfSSCTC aycneuqerfSSCTC

edocSCD aedocSCD

SCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO aSCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO

emaNyromeM aemaNyromeM

lennahCyromeM FFO/NOtuokcoL alennahCyromeM FFOtuokcoL

992~092lennahC a982~00lennahC

ycneuqerfXR/XT aycneuqerfXR

aycneuqerfXT

XR/XTrofedoM aXRrofedoM

aXTrofedoM

ycneuqerftesffO aycneuqerftesffO

noitceridtfihS anoitceridtfihS

FFO/NOesreveR aFFO/NOesreveR

ycneuqerfXR/XT )xelpmis(pets

apetsycneuqerfXR

apetsycneuqerfXT

ycneuqerfenoT aycneuqerfenoT

ycneuqerfSSCTC aycneuqerfSSCTC

edocSCD aedocSCD

SCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO aSCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO

emaNyromeM aemaNyromeM

lennahCyromeM FFO/NOtuokcoL alennahCyromeM FFOtuokcoL

The tables above illustrate how data is transferred

between memory channels:

10 MEMORY FEATURES

STORING FREQUENCY RANGES

Memory channels 290 to 299 allow you to store

frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan.

Program Scan is described in the next chapter. To

tune or scan frequencies within a specified range,

store the start and end frequencies for that range in

advance.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

2Select the desired start frequency.

3Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the

storage process, press [CLR].

4Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP] or

[DWN] to select a memory channel in the range of

290 to 299.

• You can also select a channel by entering a

3-digit number, such as 290, using the numeric

keys.

5Press [M.IN] to store the start frequency in the

memory channel.

• “CLOSE INPUT” appears on the sub dot-matrix

display.

6Turn the MAIN control or the MULTI/ CH control to

select the end frequency.

7Press [M.IN] to store the end frequency in the

memory channel.

• The previous data stored in the channel is

overwritten.

■Confirming Start/End Frequencies

Use this procedure to check the start and end

frequencies that you stored in channels 290 to

299.

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]

or [DWN] to select a memory channel from 290

to 299.

3Press [–] to check the start frequency and [+]

to check the end frequency.

■Programmable VFO

Using the start and end frequencies that you

stored in channels 290 to 299, Programmable

VFO restricts the frequency range that you can

tune with the Tuning control. One application of

this function is to help you operate within the

authorized frequency limits of your license.

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]

or [DWN] to select a memory channel from 290

to 299.

Now you can only tune from the start frequency to

the end frequency, using the MAIN control.

Note: Pressing [UP]/ [DWN]

or turning the MULTI/ CH control

results changing the memory channel number while in Programable

VFO mode.

MEMORY CHANNEL LOCKOUT

You can lock out memory channels that you prefer

not to monitor during Memory Scan. Memory

Scan is described in the next chapter {page 68}.

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]

or [DWN] to select the memory channel.

3Press [CLR] momentarily.

• Pressing [CLR] for more than approximately

2 seconds erases the contents of the

memory channel.

• A dot appears beside the right-most digit of

the memory channel number to indicate the

channel has been locked out.

• Repeatedly pressing [CLR] toggles

between adding and removing the channel

from the scan list.

ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS

If there are memory channels that you will not recall

in the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of

those channels.

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP] or

[DWN] to select the memory channel.

• You can also select a channel by entering a

3-digit number, such as 012, using the numeric

keys.

3Press and hold [CLR] for approximately two

seconds.

•A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel

data is erased.

10 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY CHANNEL NAME

You can assign a name to each memory channel. A

maximum of 7 alpha-numeric characters can be

stored.

1Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP] or

[DWN] to select a memory channel.

3Press [DISP].

4Press [+] or [–] to select a desired alpha-numeric

character. You can move the cursor to the left by

pressing [MAIN], or to the right by pressing

[SUB]. Or, you can use an optional DTMF

microphone to enter alpha-numeric characters.

Note: Alpha-numeric entries are limited to those characters

shown in the following DTMF character table.

5After selecting all the necessary characters for the

memory channel name, press [M.IN] to store the

name, or press [DISP] to select a Memory Group.

You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9).

Enter the desired group number by pressing a

numeric key. The selected group is shown in a

larger font. After selecting a group, press [M.IN]

to store the name and group number in the

memory channel.

6When you recall a memory channel with a name,

the name is displayed on the dot-matrix display

along with the memory channel number and

group number {page 64}.

Available characters using the [+]/[–] keys

FMTD yek sretcarahcelbaliavA

1qz1QZ

2abc2ABC

3def3DEF

4ghi4GHI

5jkl5JKL

6mno6MNO

7p r s 7PRS

8tuv8TUV

9wxy9WXY

0ecaps0

?! ' .,–/

&# ( )<> ;

:"@

*noitcnufoN

AthgirrosrucehtevoM

BtfelrosrucehtevoM

CretcarahcdetcelesehteteleD

DsaemaS ]NI.M[ yek

Available characters using a DTMF Mic

sretcarahcelbaliavA

ABCDEFGH I J

KLMNOPQRST

UVWXY Z [ ¥ ] ^

_`abcdefgh

i j k lmnopqr

stuvwxyz{ |

}~\ PS!"#$%&

’()*+,–./0

123456789:

;<=>?@

sepyt-EllarofsretcarahclanoitiddA

ÀÁÂÃÄÅÆŒÇÈ

ÉÊËÌÍÎÏ ÑÒ

ÓÔÕÖØÙÚÛÜ

Ÿàáâãäæœçè

éêëìíîïñòó

ôõöøùúûü ÿ

ßå

10 MEMORY FEATURES

QUICK MEMORY

Quick memory is designed to quickly and temporarily

save data without specifying a particular memory

channel. Use Quick memory to store data you will

not use in future operating sessions. For example, as

you tune across the band looking for DX, it is

convenient to store stations that you want to contact.

You can quickly jump between several different

memory channels as you monitor them.

This transceiver provides ten Quick memory channels

(“0_” to “9_”) that can store the following data:

STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY

Each time you store a new frequency, all previously

stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective

Quick memory channel. When all ten memory

channels contain frequencies, storing one more

frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9

off the stack (the data is lost).

The following diagram illustrates how the Quick

Memory stacks the data in memory each time you

press QUICK MEMORY [M.IN].

dnaycneuqerfAOFV edomgnitarepo dnaycneuqerfBOFV edomgnitarepo

FFO/NOreviecer-buS ycneuqerfreviecer-buS edomgnitarepodna

FFO/NOTIRFFO/NOTIX

ycneuqerftesffoTIX/TIRhtdiwdnabretlifrevieceR

FFO/NOreknalBesioNFFO/NOENIF

noitcudeResioNPSD 2/1/FFO lecnaCtaeBPSD FFO/NO

hctoNotuAPSD FFO/NO snoitcnufXR/XT

24.911

Memory 0

144.005

Memory 1

14.235

Memory 2

441.250

Memory 3

18.111

Memory 4

50.015

Memory 5

7.082

Memory 6

29.610

Memory 7

3.545

Memory 8

145.250

Memory 9

21.005

Memory 0

24.911

Memory 1

144.005

Memory 2

14.235

Memory 3

441.250

Memory 4

18.111

Memory 5

50.015

Memory 6

7.082

Memory 7

29.610

Memory 8

3.545

Memory 9

14.085

Memory 0

21.005

Memory 1

24.911

Memory 2

144.005

Memory 3

14.235

Memory 4

441.250

Memory 5

18.111

Memory 6

50.015

Memory 7

7.082

Memory 8

29.610

Memory 9

MEMORY GROUP

To manage 300 memory channels, you can divide

them up into a maximum of 10 groups (Groups 0 to

9). After you configure a Memory Group, you can

select only one or more of the Memory Groups you

want to recall, in Memory Recall mode. As a default,

all memory channels are stored in Group 0.

To change the Memory Channel Group:

1Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

2Select the desired memory channel for which you

want to change the Memory Group by turning the

MULTI/ CH control.

3Press [DISP].

• The Memory Name input prompt appears.

Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a

Memory Name using [+]/ [–] and [MAIN]/

[SUB] {page 63}.

4The current Memory Group appears in a larger

font.

<TS-2000/ Diagram 64-03>

5Press a numeric key to change the selected

Group number. The newly selected Group

number appears in a larger font.

6Press [M.IN] to store the settings.

■Memory Group Select

After you configure Memory Groups to the Memory

Channels, you can select one or more of the Groups

to be recalled in Memory Recall mode.

To select Memory Groups:

1Press [FUNC], [Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL] to enter

Memory Group Select mode.

2Number 0 ~ 9 appears in the main dot-matrix

display. The selected Memory Group numbers are

displayed in larger fonts. To change the selection,

press a numeric key. To select all the Memory

Groups, press [•/ DCS/SEL]. At least, one

Memory Group must be selected.

<TS-2000/ Diagram 64-04>

3Press [M.IN] to save the setting and exit.

4You can now recall only the selected Memory

Groups in Memory Recall mode.

10 MEMORY FEATURES

You can store data in the Quick Memory only when

using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and

receiving.

1Select the frequency, mode, etc. on the main

transceiver or sub-receiver VFO.

2Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

• Each time QUICK MEMO [M.IN] is pressed,

the current VFO data is written to Quick

memory.

Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, this ON status and the offset will

also be stored.

RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS

You can recall a Quick memory channel only when

using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and

receiving.

1Press QUICK MEMO [MR].

• The current memory channel number appears.

• If there is no data stored in any Quick memory

channel or no data cannot be recalled to the

current VFO, an error beep sounds.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a Quick

memory channel (0 to 9).

• You cannot change memory channels while

transmitting.

3To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.

Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the

TF-SET function.

TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES

After recalling a Quick memory channel, you can

temporarily change the data without overwriting the

contents of the channel. You can change the

frequency even when you select OFF in Menu

No. 06B.

1Press QUICK MEMO [MR].

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a Quick

memory channel (0 to 9).

3Change the frequencies and associated data.

4To store the changed data in Quick memory, press

QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

•This action stores the new data in the current

channel and bumps the old frequency to the

next higher Quick memory channel.

5To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.

Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using the

TF-SET function.

QUICK MEMORY ➡ VFO TRANSFER

This function copies the contents of the recalled

memory channel to the VFO.

1Recall a Quick memory channel.

2Press [Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL].

Note: Pressing [M

VFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing

the recalled data copies the new data to the VFO.

SCAN

Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of

your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable

with all types of Scan, you will increase your

operating efficiency.

This transceiver provides the following types of

scans.

* Visual Scan graphically shows how frequencies in a specific

range are busy.

Note:

◆

While using CTCSS or DCS, Scan stops only for the signals that

contain the same CTCSS tone or DCS code that you selected.

◆

When using S-meter Squelch, Scan stops when the received

signal strength matches or exceeds the S-meter setting. Scan

resumes 2 seconds after the signal level drops below the

S-meter setting.

◆

Pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes Scan to temporarily stop

if it is functioning on a non TX band. Pressing [PTT] on the

scanning band causes Scan to stop.

◆

Starting Scan switches OFF the Automatic Simplex Checker.

NORMAL SCAN

When you are operating the transceiver in VFO

mode, 2 types of scanning are available.

• VFO Scan

The transceiver scans the entire band of the

frequency you selected. For example, if you are

operating and receiving on the main transceiver’s

VFO A at 14.195.00 MHz, it scans all the

frequencies in the range of 30.00 kHz to

60.00000 MHz. (Refer to VFO frequency range in

Appendix XX.)

• Program Scan

By programming the start and end frequency in

Memory channels 290 ~ 299 {page 62}, you can

limit the scanning frequency range. Since there

are 10 memory channels (290 - 299) available for

specifying the start and end frequency, you can

select one or more (a maximum of 10) ranges to

scan. This is useful when you are waiting for a DX

station on a certain frequency but the station may

appear on slightly higher or lower frequency.

VFO SCAN

VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is

available for the current VFO. When the Program

Scan frequency range is not programmed or no Scan

Group is selected for the Program Scan, the

transceiver also scans the entire frequency range

available for the current VFO.

If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are

programmed in memory channels 290 to 299:

1Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL].

2If one or more memory channels are selected for

the Program Scan, the selected channels are

displayed in a larger font on the main dot-matrix

display.

In this case, press [•/ DCS/SEL] to temporarily

deselect all the channels.

When there are no Scan Group channels

selected, “VFO SCN MODE” appears on the sub

dot-matrix display.

3Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to the current

VFO mode.

4Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the VFO Scan.

Note:

◆

While scanning, you can change the scan speed by turning the

RIT/ SUB control. Turn the control clockwise/ counterclockwise

to decrease/ increase the scan speed. The speed indicator

appears on the main dot-matrix display, where P1 is the fastest

speed and P9 is the slowest.

◆

You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode.

◆

You cannot change the VFO Scan speed on the sub-receiver.

epyTnacS esopruP

lamroN nacS

nacSOFV ehtfodnaberitneehtsnacS detcelesuoyycneuqerf

margorP nacS

ycneuqerfcificepsehtsnacS yromeMniderotssegnar 992~092slennahc

nacSzHM nihtiwseicneuqerfehtsnacS egnarzHM1a

yromeM nacS

lennahC-llA nacS ,slennahcyromeMllasnacS 992ot00morf

puorG nacS yromeMcificepsehtsnacS spuorglennahc

llaC nacS

OFV dnalennahcllaCehtsnacS ycneuqerfOFVtnerruceht

yromeM lennahC dnalennahcllaCehtsnacS lennahcyromeMdetceleseht

lausiV *nacS

OFV

gnitarepotnerrucehtsnacS asallewsaycneuqerf forebmundeificeps wolebdnaevobaseicneuqerf langisehT.ycneuqerftaht silennahchcaefohtgnerts hparg-rabanideyalpsid

yromeM lennahC

slennahcyromeMehtsnacS langisehtsyalpsiddna anilennahchcaefohtgnerts hparg-rab

11 SCAN

PROGRAM SCAN

Program Scan monitors the range between the

start and end frequencies that you have stored in

Conventional memory channels 290 to 299. Refer

to “STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 62}

for details on how to store the start and end

frequencies.

You can select a maximum of 10 memory

channels (Memory channels 290 to 299) and

sequentially scan the ranges that you stored in

these channels. Program Scan starts with the

smallest channel number and repeats the

sequence as described below.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

• If you are operating the sub-receiver, press

[VFO/ M] to select VFO mode.

2Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL].

3If no Program scan channel is selected, all

memory channel numbers (from 290 to 299)

are displayed in small fonts. Only the one’s

digit of each memory channel is displayed on

the main dot-matrix display. 0 represents

channel 290, 1 represents channel 291, 2

represents channel 292, etc.

4To select the Program scan frequency range,

press a numeric key 0 to 9. For example,

press [3] for channel 293 only or press [3], [5],

[7] to select the channels 293, 295, and 297.

When a channel is selected for the Program

Scan, the number is displayed in a larger font.

To temporarily deselect all the channels (290 to

299) so that you can perform the VFO Scan,

press [•/ DCS/ SEL]. (Refer to “VFO SCAN”

on page 66)

Note :

◆

At least one of the valid Program Scan channels (from 290 to

299) must be programmed and selected to perform the

Program Scan. If no Program channel is selected or

available for the Program Scan, the transceiver performs the

VFO Scan.

◆

When performing the Program Scan on the sub-receiver, the

frequencies must be within the sub-receiver frequency range

limitations. Otherwise, the Program scan cannot be

performed. The same conditions apply to the main

transceiver.

5Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program

Scan.

• To quickly move towards a desired frequency

while scanning, turn the Tuning control or the

MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/[DWN].

• When in a mode other than FM mode, turning

the RIT/ SUB control clockwise decreases the

scan speed, and counterclockwise increases

the speed. The current scan speed is shown

on the display; P1 is the fastest speed and P9

is the slowest.

• While in FM mode, Scan automatically stops

on a frequency where a signal is present. The

transceiver will either remain on that channel

for a short time (Time-operated mode) or until

the signal drops out (Carrier-operated mode),

depending on which mode you select via Menu

No. 10 {page 68}.

6To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].

Note:

◆

If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the

Program Scan, the sub-receiver automatically skips the

memory channels that cannot be scanned on the sub-receiver.

The same conditions also apply to the main transceiver.

◆

If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control

clockwise, far beyond the squelch threshold when in FM

mode, Scan may fail to stop at a channel where a signal is

present. If this happens, turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL

control slightly counterclockwise.

◆

If you press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] before storing any frequency

range for memory channels 290 to 299, the transceiver starts

VFO scan.

◆

When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges

that you selected with channel numbers, Scan starts with the

current frequency. The operating mode stored in the memory

channel is used.

◆

When the current receive frequency is outside all the ranges

that you selected with the channel numbers, Scan starts with

the start frequency stored in the smallest channel number.

◆

The operating mode can be changed while scanning, but the

memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode.

◆

When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of

the MULTI/ CH control, turning the control clockwise causes

Scan to jump to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to

the end frequency.

◆

Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT

functions.

◆

While in FM mode, the Program Scan monitors rounded off

frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 04 setting.

◆

You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.

PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED

You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for

each memory channel from 290 to 299 so that the

Program Scan slows down the scanning speed. To

specify the slow down frequency points, first program

the start and end frequencies into a memory channel

(290 ~ 299) {page 62}.

1Access Menu No. 07 to set the function ON

(default is OFF).

2You can further configure the slow down frequency

width. Access Menu No. 08 to select the range

from 100 Hz to 500 Hz.

Note: If you select, for example, 500 Hz for Menu No. 08, the

Program Scan slows down to a

500 Hz width, centering the

frequency you marked below.

11 SCAN

3Press [VFO/ M] to recall the memory channel

(290 - 299) for which you want to specify the scan

slow down frequencies.

4Press [+] or [–] to confirm the start or end

frequency.

5Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency

point that you want the Program Scan to slow

down. Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to mark the

Slow down frequency point. The icon appears.

6Repeat step 5 to specify the center slow down

frequency points. You can specify a maximum of

5 frequency points for each channel.

7If you want to clear the slow down frequeny points

that you previously stored, press and hold QUICK

MEMO [M.IN] for 1 second. A confirmation beep

sounds and the transceiver clears all the slow

down frequency points you specified in the

memory channel.

Note: You must clear all the previous slow down frequency

points; you cannot clear only specific points.

8Press [VFO/ M] to return to VFO mode.

9Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program Scan

with the slow down frequency point(s).

Note:

◆

During the Program Scan, you can turn the RIT/ SUB control to

adjust the scanning speed. Turn the control clockwise/ counter-

clockwise to slow down/ speed up the scan. The Program Scan

speed indicator appears on the main dot-matrix display during

the Program Scan; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.

◆

You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode.

◆

You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.

◆

You cannot specify the Program Scan slow down frequency

point for FM mode.

SCAN HOLD

This function stops Program Scan for approximately 5

seconds, then resumes Scan when you jump to the

desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or

the MULTI/ CH control, or by pressing Mic [UP]/

[DWN].

To use this function, access Menu No. 09, and select

ON. The default is OFF.

MHz SCAN

When you operate the main transceiver or sub-

receiver in VFO mode, you can scan an entire 1 MHz

frequency range within the current VFO frequency.

1Press [VFO/ M] to select VFO mode.

2Select the desired frequency to perform the MHz

Scan. If you want to scan the entire 145 MHz

frequency, for example, select 145.650 MHz.

Scan will operate between 145.00000 MHz and

145.99999 MHz.

3Press and hold [1MHz/ SEL] to start the MHz

Scan.

4Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the scan

speed.

5To stop the MHz Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or

[CLR].

Note:

◆

You cannot change the MHz Scan speed in FM mode.

◆

You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.

MEMORY SCAN

Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which

you have stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or

only a desired group of memory channels (Group

Scan).

Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal

is present, regardless of the operating mode. The

transceiver will either remain on that channel for a

short time (Time-operated mode) or until the signal

drops out (Carrier-operated mode). Use Menu No. 10

to select either mode. The default is Time-operated.

SCAN RESUME METHOD

The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency (or

memory channel) where a signal is detected. It then

continues scanning according to which resume mode

you have selected. You can choose one of the

following modes. The default is Time-operated mode.

•Time-Operated mode

The transceiver remains on a busy frequency (or

memory channel) for approximately 6 seconds,

then continues to scan, even if the signal is still

present.

•Carrier-Operated mode

The transceiver remains on the busy frequency (or

memory channel) until the signal drops out. There

is a 2 second delay between signal drop-out and

scan resumption.

1Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu

No. 10.

3Press [+]/ [–] to select TO (Time-Operated) or CO

(Carrier-Operated).

4Press [MENU] to complete the setting and exit

Menu mode.

You can lock out the memory channels that you

prefer not to monitor while scanning. To do this, refer

to “Memory Channel Lockout” {page 62}.

11 SCAN

ALL-CHANNEL SCAN

Use the following procedure to scan all the memory

channels that contain frequency data in sequence,

ignoring the Memory Group number.

1Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode

via Menu No. 10.

2Press [VFO/ M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

3Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust

the squelch threshold.

4Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to enter Scan

Group Select mode.

• The selected Groups appear in a larger font.

5Press [•/ DCS/SEL] to deselect all Groups so that

the transceiver scans the memory channel

sequencially, ignoring the Memory Group number

data.

6Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to Memory

Recall mode.

7Press [SCAN/ SG. SEL] to start All-channel Scan.

• Scan starts from the current memory channel

and ascends up through the channel numbers

(scan direction cannot be changed).

• To jump to a desired channel while scanning,

turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic

[UP]/ [DWN].

8To stop Scan, press [SCAN] or [CLR].

Note:

◆

If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Memory

Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels

that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same

conditions apply to the main transceiver.

◆

If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control

clockwise, far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to

stop at a channel where a signal is present. If this happens,

turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise.

◆

Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT

functions.

GROUP SCAN

For the purpose of Group Scan, the 300 memory

channels can be divided into 10 groups so that you

can select one or more groups to be scanned,

depending on the situation.

When you store frequency data in a memory channel

{page 58}, the transceiver automatically adds the

default Group 0 (zero), to the memory channel data.

To recall the existing memory channel data and

revise the Group number:

1Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

2Select the desired memory channel by turning the

MULTI/ CH control.

3Press [DISP].

• The Memory Name input prompt appears.

Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a

Memory Name using [+]/ [–] and [MAIN]/

[SUB] {page 63}.

4Press the desired Group number ([0] to [9]) using

the numeric keypad. The selected Group number

appears in a larger font.

Note: You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9) for each

memory channel.

5Press [M.IN] to store and overwrite the new

channel data to the memory channel.

6Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each memory

channel you want to assign to a specific group.

You can select a maximum of 10 groups and

sequentially scan the channels that belong to those

groups. Group Scan starts with the smallest group

number and repeats the sequence, for example,

group 3 ➞ group 5 ➞ group 7 ➞ group 3.

1Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode

via Menu No. 10.

2Press [VFO/ M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

3Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust

the squelch threshold.

4Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to enter Scan

Group Select mode. Then, using the numeric

keypad, enter the group numbers you want to

scan. i.e.- Press [3] for group 3, or press [3], [5],

[7] for groups 3, 5, and 7. The selected Memory

Groups appear in a larger font.

5Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to exit Scan Group Select

mode.

6Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to start Memory

Group Scan.

• Scan ascends up through the channel numbers

(scan direction cannot be changed).

• To jump to a desired channel while scanning,

turn the MULTI/ CH control or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN].

7To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].

After using Group Scan, press [FUNC],

[SCAN/ SG.SEL], then [•/ DCS/ SEL] to deselect all

the Group numbers you selected in step 4. This

returns you to All-channel Scan (factory default).

Note:

◆

If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Group

Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels

that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same

conditions apply to the main transceiver.

◆

If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control

clockwise, far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to

stop at a channel in which a signal is present. If this happens,

turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise.

◆

When the current channel is within one of the groups that you

selected, Scan starts with the current channel.

11 SCAN

◆

When the current channel is outside all the groups that you

selected, Scan starts with the group number that is larger than

and closest to the group number of the current channel.

◆

Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT

functions.

CALL SCAN

A Call channel can be stored for each operating

band, such as HF, 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz

and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 Optional) bands. You can

monitor one of these Call channels and the current

operating frequency alternatively.

1Select the frequency you want to monitor.

• In VFO mode, press [A/B] to select VFO A or B

for the main transceiver or press [SUB] or

[CTRL] to select the sub-receiver VFO. Then,

turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH

control to select the desired frequency.

• In Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/ M] to

select the memory channel you want to monitor

by turning the MULTI/ CH control.

2Press [CALL/ C.IN] to recall the Call channel for

the frequency band.

3Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL].

4The Call channel and the selected VFO frequency

or memory channel are monitored alternatively.

5To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].

VISUAL SCAN

While you are receiving, Visual Scan allows you to

monitor frequencies near the current operating

frequency. Visual Scan graphically displays how all

frequencies in the selected range are busy. You will

see a maximum of 7 segments, for each frequency

(channel) point that represent relative S-meter levels.

Determine the scan range by selecting the center

frequency and the number of channels. The default

number of channels is 61.

■Using Visual Scan

1Select the desired band for Visual Scan.

2Turn the Tuning control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN], to select the operating frequency.

• This frequency will be used as the center

frequency.

3Press and hold [DISP] for approximately

1 second to start Visual Scan.

• The current center frequency is displayed

on the main frequency display and the

current scanning frequency is displayed on

the sub frequency display. The operating

mode and the number of channels to be

scanned are displayed on the main dot-

matrix display. The sub dot-matrix display

shows the relative S-meter level of each

frequency point, vertically.

• To pause Scan, press [DISP]. “P” appears

on the main dot-matrix display. Press

[DISP] again to resume the Visual Scan

4To change the current scanning frequency, turn

the Tuning control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].

• The displayed frequency changes and the

cursor moves.

• Press [1MHz/ SEL] to make the current

scanning frequency the new center

frequency.

• You can move the frequency using the

MAIN control. If you want to revert to the

original center frequency, press [FM/ AM/

NAR].

5To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or [SCAN].

■Selecting the Number of Channels to Scan

1Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu

No. 11.

3Press [+] or [–] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or

181 channels for the number of channels to

scan.

4Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.

Note:

◆

The current frequency step of the MULTI/ CH control is used

for the Visual Scan.

◆

While performing the Visual Scan, the DUAL WATCH

function {page 47} is temporarily disabled unless you are

using the 144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz in FM or AM mode and

the Control Band for the main transceiver.

◆

If you start the Visual Scan from the frequency on the sub-

receiver, the frequency is transferred to the main display,

then the Visual Scan starts.

◆

If you start the Visual Scan in Memory Recall mode, the

memory channel frequencies will be scanned.

◆

If the frequency range specified for Program Scan or

Program VFO is narrower than the range specified for Visual

Scan, the range for Program Scan or VFO will be used for

Visual Scan.

◆

Visual Scan stops when you transmit.

◆

Depending on the transceiver conditions, Visual Scan and

the S-meter level may differ.

11 SCAN

< This page is intesionally left blank at this moment.

Additional Visual Scan explanation may be flooded

over to this page>

APO (Auto Power OFF)

You can set the TS-2000 to switch OFF automatically

if no keys or controls are pressed or adjusted for a

certain period of time. 1 minute before the

transceiver switches OFF, “CHECK” is output in

morse code. You can select the time from OFF, 60,

120, and 180 minutes.

Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 57.

Select the APO time from OFF, 60, 120, or 180

minutes.

Note:

◆

The APO function works during the Scan.

◆

The APO timer starts counting down the timer when no key

presses, no control adjusments, and no command (RS-232C

port) sequences are detected.

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER

As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION” {page 1},

matching the impedance of the coaxial cable and

antenna is important. To adjust the impedance

between the antenna and the transceiver, you have

the choice of using the internal tuner or an external

tuner. This section describes how to use the internal

tuner. For the external tuner, consult the instruction

manual that comes with the tuner.

1Select the transmit frequency.

2Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or

ANT 2.

• If an external tuner is connected to the ANT 1

connector, select ANT 2 to use the internal

antenna tuner. The internal antenna tuner is

automatically bypassed if an external antenna

tuner is connected to ANT 1.

3Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.

• “AT TX” appears, indicating that the internal

tuner is in-line (not bypassed).

4Press [AT/ ANT1/2] for more than one second.

• CW mode is automatically selected and tuning

begins.

• “AT” blinks and the MAIN band LED lights red.

• To cancel tuning, press [AT/ ANT1/2] again.

• If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely

OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

)zHM(egnaRycneuqerFnoitceleSannetnA

5.2~30.01.4~5.2

5.7~1.45.01~5.7

5.41~5.015.81~5.41

5.12~5.815.52~5.12

0.03~5.520.06~0.03

reviecsnartNIAM )zHM( reviecer-BUS )zHM(

441TNA251~241 471~811 003~022

034TNA054~024215~003

G2.1TNA )lanoitpo( 0031~0421A/N

ALT (Auto Lock Tuning)

The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) allows the transceiver to

adjust the center receiving frequency automatically

when you operate on the 1.2 GHz band in FM mode.

When the receiving audio signal is distorted or

breaking up, turn this function on to adjust the center

receiving frequency. Some old 1.2 GHz transceivers

do not have stable and precise oscilating circuits and

tend to be slightly off (drifted from) the displayed

frequency.

Press [FUNC], [XIT/ ALT] to toggle the ALT function

ON or OFF.

• “ALT” appears when the function is ON.

Note: The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) works only on the 1.2 GHz

band in FM mode.

ANTENNAS

HF/ 50 MHz Band

■SWITCHING ANT 1/ ANT 2

Two antenna connectors are available for the HF/

50 MHz band on the rear panel. When you

operate the main transceiver on these

frequencies, you can select one of 2 antennas.

Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT 1/2] to select ANT 1 or

ANT 2 for the main transceiver.

• “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” appears to indicate which

antenna is selected.

The ANT 1/ANT 2 setting will automatically be

stored in the antenna band memory. Next time

you select the same band, the same antenna will

be automatically selected.

Note: Connect an external antenna tuner to the ANT 1

connector only, then select ANT 1. The internal tuner will be

automatically bypassed when the transceiver is switched ON.

VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz Band

When you select the VHF, UHF, or 1.2 GHz band

on the main transceiver and/or the sub-receiver,

the following antenna is automatically selected

based on the operating frequencies.

Note: The same antenna is shared and used when the main

transceiver and sub-receiver are on the same band. The

frequency coverage varies depending on the market codes.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

high (more than 10:1), an alarm (“SWR” in

morse code) sounds and the internal tuner is

bypassed. Before attempting to tune again,

adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR.

5See the display and check that tuning has

successfully finished.

• If the tuning was successful, “AT” stops blinking

and the MAIN band LED turns off.

• If tuning does not finish within approximately

20 seconds, an alarm (“5” in morse code)

sounds. Press [AT/ ANT1/2] to stop the alarm

and tuning.

If you access Menu No. 27 and select ON, received

signals will also pass through the internal tuner.

When this function is ON, “RX AT” appears. This may

reduce interference on the receive frequency.

Note:

◆

The internal tuner will not tune outside the authorized transmit

limits of Amateur bands.

◆

Pressing [AT/ ANT1/2] for more than one second while

transmitting, interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.

◆

If you would like to use a seperate receiving antenna, access

Menu No. 18 and switch it ON. When this function is ON,

received signals bypass the internal antenna tuner.

◆

While using CW Full Break-in, the internal tuner will be in-line

for both transmitting and receiving.

◆

Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60 seconds.

“AT” disappears and the error beeps stop.

◆

Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates 1:1.

This happens due to the tuning algorithm; this is not a

malfunction.

◆

Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment,

the internal tuner may not retune. This happens because of

an SWR calculation algorithm tolerance between 10 W

(approx.) transmit power for tuning and 100 W transmit power.

◆

If tuning does not finish even though the SWR meter indicates

smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR,

then attempt to tune again.

◆

Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1:1, depending on the

transceiver conditions.

■PRESETTING

After each successful tuning session, the AT

Preset memory function stores the position of the

tuning capacitor in the memory. The position of

the capacitor is stored for each of the antenna

tuner band (see the following table) and for each

antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).

Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.

• “AT TX” will appear, showing that the internal

tuner is in-line (not bypassed).

• Each time you go across the antenna tuner

band, the AT Preset memory is automatically

recalled to position the tuning capacitor without

the need for retuning. If no preset data exists

for a particular band/antenna combination, then

the default data of 50 Ω is used.

Note: Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum

matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band

has the preset data.

ATTENUATOR

The attenuator function is useful when extremely

strong signals exist nearby your receiving frequency.

When these type of signals exist nearby your

receiving frequency, the AGC function may be

erroneously controlled by the strong singals, rather

than by the target receiving signal. If this happens,

the target receiving signal can be masked and buried

by the strong signals. In this case, turn the

Attenuator function ON.

1Press [ATT/ F LOCK]

2“ATT” appears.

To return to the normal operation, press

[ATT/ F LOCK] again.

Note: If the same band is selected for both the main transceiver

and the sub-receiver, the Attenuator function is on for both

receivers.

AUTO MODE

You can configure a maximum of 29 points (HF/

50 MHz), 9 points (144 MHz band), 9 points (430

(440) MHz band), and 9 points (1.2 GHz band) of the

main transceiver VFO (VFO A and B) frequencies to

change the operating mode automatically when you

change the frequency.

As a default, the following modes are programmed on

each operating band.

HF/ 50 MHz band

0.03 ~ 9.5 MHz: LSB

9.5 MHz ~ 60 MHz: USB

144 MHz band

142 ~ 152 MHz: FM

430 (440) MHz band

420 ~ 450 MHz: FM

1.2 GHz band (optional)

1240 ~ 1300 MHz: FM

To add the frequency points to the Auto Mode

selection:

)zHM(egnaRycneuqerFteserPTA

58.1~30.005.2~58.1

525.3~05.2575.3~525.3

527.3~575.301.4~527.3

30.7~01.401.7~30.7

05.7~01.705.01~05.7

01.41~05.0105.41~01.41

05.81~05.4151.12~05.81

05.12~51.1205.52~05.12

00.92~05.5200.03~00.92

00.15~00.0300.25~00.15

00.35~00.2500.06~00.35

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

The next table is an example of adding 4 frequency

points into memory. With this setup, the transceiver

selects AM mode below 1.62 MHz, CW mode from

1.62MHz to 2.0 MHz, LSB mode from 2.0 MHz to

9.5 MHz, FM mode from 9.5 MHz to 53.0 MHz and

USB mode from 53.0 MHz to 60 MHz. If multiple data

contains the same frequency but a different mode is

entered into memory, the lowest numbered memory

channel is reflected as the Auto Mode.

To activate the AUTO MODE function, press [FUNC],

[LSB/ USB/ AUTO].

BEEP FUNCTION

The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry,

error status, and malfunctions of the transceiver.

Although you can turn the beep function OFF by

accessing Menu No. 12, we recommend you leave it

ON in order to detect unexpected errors and

malfunctions.

You can also change the output level of the beeps by

accessing Menu No. 12 and selecting 1 to 9.

The transceiver generates morse code to tell you

which mode is selected when you change operating

modes.

When you change operating modes, the following

morse code sounds:

1Press and hold [USB/ LSB/ AUTO] +

POWER ON.

2Press [+] or [–] to select the band to add the

frequency points.

3Select a memory channel number by turning the

MULTI/ CH control.

4Turn the MAIN control to select a desired

frequency point to change the operating mode.

Or, press [ENT] to enter the desired frequency

point {page 37} using the numeric keys.

5Press one of the mode keys to select the desired

operating mode.

• The selected mode appears on the main dot-

matrix display.

6Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have added all the

data.

7Press [CLR] to store the data.

The table below shows the default Auto Mode

frequency points for the HF/ 50 MHz band. When

you activate the Auto Mode selection by pressing

[FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO], the transceiver

automatically selects the mode; LSB for frequencies

below 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies greater than

or equal to 9.5 MHz.

The table below is an example of how to add the

frequency point of 1.62 MHz/ AM into memory. With

this set up, the transceiver selects AM mode below

1.62 MHz, LSB mode from 1.62 MHz to 9.5 MHz and

USB mode from 9.5 MHz to 60.0 MHz.

.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO

0zHM5.9 BSL

zHM30.0

≤<BSL zHM5.9

zHM5.9

≤BSU ≤

zHM0.06

1zHM5.9 BSL

2zHM5.9 BSL

3zHM5.9 BSL

•

••

•

82 zHM5.9 BSL

.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO

0zHM26.1 MA zHM30.0≤<MA zHM26.1

zHM26.1

≤<BSL zHM5.9

zHM5.9

≤BSU ≤

zHM0.06

1zHM5.9 BSL

2zHM5.9 BSL

3zHM5.9 BSL

•

••

•

82 zHM5.9 BSL

.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO

0zHM26.1 MA

zHM30.0≤<MA zHM26.1

zHM26.1≤<WC zHM0.2

zHM0.2

≤<BSL zHM5.9

zHM5.9

≤<MF zHM0.35

zHM0.35

≤BSU ≤

zHM0.06

1zHM0.2 WC

2zHM0.7 BSL

3zHM5.9 BSL

•

••

•

82 zHM0.35 MF

edoM tuptuOedoCesroM

BSL··–·)L(

BSU–··)U(

WC·–·–)C(

R-WC·–··–·–)RC(

KSF·–·)R(

R-KSF·–··–·)RR(

NMA/MA–·)A(

NMF/MF·–··)F(

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

The transceiver also generates the following warning,

confirmation, and malfunction beeps.

CALL CHANNEL

A CALL channel is a frequency that is often used

when looking for a station with which to make contact

in FM mode. Each frequency band (HF, 50 MHz,

144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz) has one

CALL channel. The default CALL frequencies are

shown below.

To recall the CALL channel:

1Press [CALL/ C.IN].

2Press [CALL/ C.IN] again to return to the previous

operating frequency.

To revise the default CALL channel frequency:

1Select a new CALL frequency and operating mode

on the VFO.

2Press [FUNC], [CALL/ C.IN] to copy the new

frequency and mode to the CALL channel.

1: All E-types 2: K-type

DISPLAY

■ BRIGHTNESS

The brightness of the LCD display can be selected

from OFF, and 1 to 4 by accessing Menu No. 00.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to access Menu No. 00.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit

Menu mode.

■ CONTRAST

The contrast of the LCD dot-matrix display can be

selected from 1 to 16 by accessing Menu No. 59.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to access Menu No. 59.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select an appropriate contrast

from 1 to 16.

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit

Menu mode.

■ KEY ILLUMINATION

The front panel key illumination can be switched

ON or OFF.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to access Menu No. 01.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select ON or OFF.

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit

Menu mode.

DTMF

■ MANUAL DTMF DIALING

If you have an optional MC-47 DTMF microphone,

you can send DTMF tones while you are

transmitting.

To send a series of DTMF tones:

1Press Mic [PTT] or [SEND] on the front panel.

2Press the desired DTMF keys to transmit.

• DTMF tones are monitored through the

speaker.

3Release Mic [PTT] or press [SEND] to return

to receive mode.

■ DTMF MEMORY

Entering DTMF tones

The transceiver has 10 DTMF Memory Channels.

Each channel can store a series of 16 DTMF

tones. You can also name each DTMF entry using

a maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to access Menu No. 45.

2Press [SUB] to access Menu No. 45A

dnaB lennahCLLACtluafeD edoMdnaycneuqerf

FHMF/zHM6.92

zHM05MF/.zHM0.15

zHM441MF/zHM00.441

zHM)044(034 zHM0.034

zHM0.234,

zHM044,

zHG2.1MF/zHM0421

speeB snaemtitahW

peebtrohsdehctiphgihA.desserpsiyekdilavA

peebgnoldehctiphgihA ,detpeccasiyrtneyeKA enutTAro,stratsnacS .detelpmocsah

peebtrohsdehctipwolA.desserpsiyekdilavninA

edocesromni”LU“ tiucricLLPlanretniehT .detcetedsisutatskcolnu

edocesromni”S“ ebtonnacenuTotuAWC .detelpmoc

edocesromni”5“ ebtonnacenuTTA anihtiwdetelpmoc .emitdeificeps

edocesromni”RWS“ ootsiRWSs’annetnaehT ot)1:01revo(hgih .enuTTAmrofrep

edocesromni”KCEHC“

OPAerofebetunim1 noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA( reviecsnartehtsehctiws .FFO

edocesromni”TB“ WCarofgnitiaW .dedrocerebotegassem

edocesromni”RA“ egassemtnerrucehT .llufsiyromem

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

3Press [SUB] again to enter DTMF Memory

Channel mode.

4Select a DTMF Memory Channel (0 to 9) using

the MULTI/ CH control.

5Press [SUB] to enter the desired memory

name. Use [+] or [–] to select the characters.

Press [MAIN] or [SUB] to move the cursor left

or right while entering the DTMF memory

name. You can also use the Mic DTMF keys to

enter the characters. Refer to the table on

page XX for the assignment of characters and

numbers.

6Press [M.IN] to store the name into memory.

7Select the desired DTMF tone using [+] or [–],

then press [SUB] to move the cursor to the

right to enter the next DTMF tone.

8Repeat step 7 until you enter all the desired

DTMF tones. You can enter a maximum of 16

DTMF tones for each DTMF Memory Channel.

9Press [M.IN] to store the data into memory.

Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data

To send the DTMF Memory Channel data while

you are transmitting:

1Press QUICK MEMORY [MR] while you are

trasmitting.

2The DTMF Memory Channel number and the

memory name appear on the main dot-matrix

display.

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the DTMF

Memory Channel you want to transmit.

4Press QUICK MEMORY [MR] to transmit the

DTMF tones.

• The DTMF tones are monitored through the

speaker while they are transmitted.

DTMF Tone Time Length

When transmitting a series of DTMF tones, each

tone duration is set to the 50 ms (tone)/ 50 ms

(mute) format as default. Some repeaters or auto

patch controllers may require longer DTMF tones

and mutes.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to access Menu No. 45B.

2Press [+] or [–] to select SLOW.

3Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.

The DTMF tones will now be sent using the 100

ms (tone)/ 100 ms (mute) format.

DTMF Pause Period

In the DTMF Memory, you can enter blanks

(pauses) among a series of DTMF tones. The

default pause period is set to 500 ms, but you can

change this value by accessing Menu No. 45C.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to access Menu No. 45C.

2Press [+] or [–] to select the desired DTMF

Pause period (default is 500 ms).

3Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.

HF RX ANTENNA

If you have a seperate HF antenna (below 30 MHz )

only for receiving, connect the antenna coaxial cable

to HF RX ANT connector on the rear panel. This

connector is considered to be connected a beverage

antenna or directional loop antenna for low-band

operation.

To use HF RX ANTENNA connector, access Menu

No. 18 and select ON. When the HF RX ANTENNA

is selected for receiving, “EXT” appears on the

display.

LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL

When you connect an external HF linear amplifier to

the TS-2000(X) transceiver using the REMOTE

connector, select 1 (fast switching/ 10 ms delay) or 2

(slow switching/ 50 ms delay) to activate the internal

relay so you can interface with the HF linear amplifier.

Some linear amplifiers require a long transmission

delay time because of the slow antenna relay

switching time. In this case, select 2 for the slow

switching.

If you have 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, or

1.2 GHz band linear amplifiers, connect the linear

amplifier control cable to the EXT.CONT connector for

these bands.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

select Menu No. 28A (HF), 28B (50 MHz), 28C

(144 MHz), 28D (430 (440) MHz), or 28E

(1.2 GHz).

2Press [+] or [–] to select OFF, 1, or 2.

• OFF disables the TS-2000 relay.

• 1 is 10 ms transmission delay.

• 2 is 50 ms transmission delay.

Note: If CW full break-in is enabled, 10 ms transmission delay is

applied regardless of the Menu No. 28 settings.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

LOCK FUNCTIONS

■ FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION

Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls

to prevent you from accidentally activating a

function or changing current settings.

Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to toggle Frequency

Lock ON or OFF.

• “F LOCK” appears when this function is ON.

The following keys and controls are disabled by

Frequency Lock:

•Tuning control •MULTI/ CH control

• [A/B] • [A=B] • [CLR]

• [CW/ FSK] • [ENT] • [FM/AM]

• [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] • [M.IN]

•[M

sVFO] • QUICK MEMO [M.IN]

• QUICK MEMO [MR]

• [SCAN/ SG. SEL] • [SPLIT]

• [UP]/ [DOWN] • [VFO/ M]

• [1MHz/ SEL] • [1/ CH1/ REC]

• [2/ CH2/ REC] • [3/ CH3/ REC]

• [9/ FINE/ STEP] • [+]/ [–]

Note:

◆

After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/ CH control and

[+]/[–] are still available in Menu mode.

◆

After activating Frequency Lock, you can still change the

transmit frequency with the Tuning control while in the

TF-SET mode.

◆

After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/ CH control is still

available for selections other than frequency and memory

channel changes.

◆

After activating Frequency Lock, [CLR] may be available in

some situations.

■ LOCK ALL FUNCTION

The Lock All function disables all the keys and

controls on the TS-2000 transceiver, except

[FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A], Mic [PTT] and [FUNC],

[ATT/ F LOCK] .

Press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to toggle the Lock

All function ON or OFF.

• “LOCK A” appears when this function is ON.

To return to normal operation, press [FUNC],

[PRE/ LOCK A].

MICROPHONE PF KEYS

When using the optional MC-47 or MC52DM

microphone, you can customize the functions of the

Mic [PF1], [PF2], [PF3], and [PF4] keys. You can

assign the following types of functions to these keys

via Menu No. 51B to 51E:

• Directly select Menu No. without pressing [MENU]

and turning the MULTI/ CH control.

.N.A2/1TNAB=AB/A.C.BLLAC1HC

2HC3HCRLCLRTCENUTWCINOMPSD

ENIFNI.M)OMEMKCIUQ(NI.M)OMEMKCIUQ(RM

MsOFV26~00UNEMBN.R.NFFOzHM1

INOMXRNACSTILPSTES-FTM/OFV1ECIOV

2ECIOV

• Activate the same function as one of the front

panel keys.

One of the following functions can be assigned to

each [PF] key Selecting OFF assigns no function to

the PF key.

MONITOR

When you are receiving while the squelch function is

ON, weak signals become intermitant.

Or, if the CTCSS function is ON, you may want to

disable the squelch function temporarily to monitor

the current channel activities.

In these cases, use the MONITOR function to disable

the squelch function temporarily.

To assign the MONITOR function to a [PF] key on the

front panel:

1Press [MENU] and turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 51A.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select RX MONI.

3Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.

Note: You can also assign the MONITOR function to a

programmable function key on an optional MC-47 microphone.

PF KEY

You can program the front panel [PF] key to assign a

function that you frequently use. The default is Voice

1 for the optional Voice Synthesizer, VS-3 {page 91}.

You can assign one of the functions in

“MICROPHONE PF KEYS” to this PF key, accessing

Menu No. 51A.

RISE TIME OF CW

The rise time of a CW signal is the time for the RF

output to rise to its maximum power after the key is

closed. The default setting, 6 ms, is fine for slow to

medium keying speed and normal weighting (dot/

dash ratio). The 4 or 2 ms settings are good for

faster keying speeds.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 32.

2Press [+] or [–] to select the desired rise time

(default is 6 ms).

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit the

Menu mode.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

If you want to reverse the output:

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 17.

2Press [+] to select ON.

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu

mode.

The output is now reversed. The signals from the

main transceiver are output from the internal speaker

and the signals from the sub-receiver are output from

the external speaker.

S-METER SQUELCH

The S-meter Squelch function opens the squelch only

when the receiving signal has the same or greater

strength than the S-meter Squelch setting. This

function helps you to not open the squelch when

receiving weak signals that you do not want to hear.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 19A.

2Press [+] to select ON.

3Turn the MAIN SQL control and/or the SUB SQL

control to adjust the S-meter Squelch threshold

level. When you turn SQL control, the indicators

on the S-meter move accordingly.

4Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the

Menu mode.

Note: The squelch threshold level of the S-meter squelch (both

MAIN and SUB SQL) is around the 9 o’clock position for FM (both

MAIN and SUB SQL) , the 11 o’clock position for other modes

(MAIN SQL), and the 9 o’clock position for AM (SUB SQL),

regardless of the SQL controls position.

Squelch Hang Time

You can adjust the squelch hang time to

continuously monitor unstable signals. When the

signal is temporarily weaker than the S-meter

Squelch threshold level, the squelch does not

mute the signal for a short period of time. In this

way, you can continuously monitor the unstable

signal.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to access Menu No. 19B.

2Press [+] or [–] to select OFF, 125 ms, 250 ms,

or 500 ms.

3Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the

Menu mode.

RX DSP EQUALIZER

■ EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO (SSB/FM/AM)

Use Menu No. 20 to change the receiver

frequency responses of the target signal. You can

select one from six different receiver profiles

including the default flat response. Selecting any

of the following items from the Menu causes

“EQ R” to appear on the display.

• Off:

The default frequency response for SSB, FM,

and AM.

• High boost:

Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective

for a bassy voice.

• Formant pass:

Improves clarity by suppressing audio

frequencies outside the normal voice frequency

range.

• Bass boost:

Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective

for a voice with more high frequency

components.

• Conventional:

Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz

and higher.

• User:

Reserved for future use. Off is programmed at

the factory as a default.

SEPERATE SPEAKER OUTPUT

The TS-2000 has 2 independent receivers and is

capable of receving 2 different frequencies at the

same time. If no external speaker is connected to the

TS-2000, both audio signals are mixed internally, then

output through the internal speaker. If you are using

at least one external speaker, you can configure the

transceiver to make a seperate output for each

receiver.

1Connect the external speaker to the EXT.SP2 jack

on the rear panel {page 2}.

2Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 16.

3Press [+] or [–] to select 1.

4Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu

mode.

The signals from the main transceiver are now output

from the external speaker and the signals from the

sub-receiver are output from the internal speaker.

If you want the transceiver to mix 1/4 of each output

to the other output, select 1 in step 2. Depending on

the external speaker location, this setting may be

comfortable to lisen to both signals.

Note: Connecting an external speaker to the EXT.SP1 jack simply

replaces the internal speaker output with EXT.SP1.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

TIME-OUT TIMER

The Time-out Timer limits the time of each

transmission. It is also useful to prevent a long

accidental transmission.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 24.

2Press [+] or [–] to select OFF, 3 minutes, 5

minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30 minutes.

3Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the

Menu mode.

TNC

This transceiver has a built-in TNC that is usually

used for the Packet Cluster Tune {page 53} or

SkyCommand II+ operations {page XX}. However,

you can also utilize the built-in TNC as a high speed

(9600 bps) or normal (1200 bps) TNC that is

controlled by a external PC or dumb terminal

{page 49}.

If you desire, you can connect an external TNC or

proprietary TNC to ACC2 connector. To interface an

external TNC with TS-2000(X), refer to the ACC2

connector information {page XX} and accessing Menu

No. 50B ~ 50F then configure and adjust the Menu

parameters to work with the external TNC.

Note: You do not have to disable the built-in TNC to interface with

an external TNC. Both the main transceiver and sub-receiver can

work independently unless the transceiver is transmitting on the

same band.

TRANSVERTER

If you have a transverter that converts the TS-2000

operating frequencies to other frequencies, you can

use this TS-2000 transceiver as a transverter exciter.

Consult the instruction manual that came with the

transverter for interfacing to the TS-2000.

1Connect the transverter to the ANT 1, ANT 2,

ANT 144, ANT 430, or ANT 1.2G (optional)

connector on the rear of the transceiver.

2Select the exciter operating frequency on the main

transceiver of the TS-2000.

• The transverter will use this frequency as the

reference for converting frequencies.

3Access Menu No. 25, and select ON by pressing

[+].

• The output power is automatically set to the

lowest power for that frequency.

4Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit the

Menu mode.

5Press [ENT], then set the target converting

frequency, using the numeric keys.

6Press [ENT] to complete the entry.

7The transceiver displays the target transverter

frequency instead of the actual operating

frequency.

Note:

◆

When using a transverter, not all the functions of this

transceiver are available.

◆

When using the optional VS-3 unit, the selected frequencies

are not announced.

TX MONITOR

TX monitor allows you to monitor the on-going

transmission sound. This is convenient when you

want to check the modulation sound quality of the

transmission. In FSK mode, you can monitor the FSK

signal that the TS-2000 is transmitting.

1Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI].

2Current TX monitor setting appears.

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the monitor

sound level from OFF, and 1 to 9.

4Press [CLR] to store the selected TX monitor

level.

Note:

◆

We recommend you use headphones when you monitor SSB,

AM, or FM mode, in order to avoid the haulings.

◆

The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using the TX

monitor function. Use the CW sidetone function to monitor CW

transmissions (Menu No. 13 and 31).

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

■Transferring Data

The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Master,

sending data to the Slave transceiver.

1Switch ON the Transfer function of each

transceiver.

• On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52

and select ON. For the compatible

transceiver, refer to the instruction manual

that came with the transceiver.

2On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an

operating frequency and mode.

3On the Master, press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

• When using another TS-2000(X) as the

Slave, “CTRL” appears on the Slave.

• The displayed data is stored in Quick

memory channel 1 on the Master and

transferred to the Slave.

Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset frequency is

added to the receive frequency to be transferred.

■Receiving Data

The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Slave,

receiving data from the Master transceiver. The

Slave can receive data using either Quick memory

channel 1 or the VFO.

1Switch ON the Transfer function of each

transceiver.

• On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52

and select ON. For the compatible

transceiver, refer to the instruction manual

that came with the transceiver.

2On the Slave, access Menu No. 53 and select

either OFF (QUICK MEMO channel 1) or ON

(the VFO).

• The default is OFF (QUICK MEMO).

3On the Master, perform the appropriate

operation to send data.

• For the correct method, refer to the

instruction manual that came with the

transceiver.

Note:

◆

If you always use the TS-2000 (X) for receiving only,

activate TX Inhibit function, accessing Menu No. 54 to

avoid unintentional transmission.

◆

When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed

with a simplex frequency, the received data replaces the

data on both VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT and XIT are

set to OFF.

◆

When the Slave receives data using the VFOs

programmed with split frequencies, the received data

replaces the data only on the TX side of the VFO. On the

Slave, XIT is set to OFF but RIT is not changed.

QUICK DATA TRANSFER

This transceiver has the capability to quickly and

conveniently transfer the receive frequency and mode

to another compatible transceiver. Compatible

transceivers include:

• TS-2000(X) • TS-570S/570D

• TS-850S • TS-870S

• TS-690S • TS-950SDX

• TS-450S

Data Transfer could be useful while contesting. A

spotting station that is searching for new contest

multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to

the running (main) station.

SETTING UP

■Equipment Needed

In addition to a compatible transceiver, the

following equipment is required:

Transfer to TS-2000(X), TS-570, or TS-870S:

• One cross-wired cable. This cable must have

a 9-pin RS-232C female connector at both

ends.

Transfer to a transceiver other than

TS-2000(X), TS-570, and TS-870S:

•KENWOOD IF-232C interface unit

• One cross-wired cable. This cable must have

a 9-pin RS-232C female connector at one end

and a 25-pin RS-232C female connector at the

other end.

• One straight cable. This cable must have a 6-

pin DIN male connector at both ends.

■Connections

For diagrams on how to connect the two

transceivers, see “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL

EQUIPMENT” {page XX}.

Note: If you are using a DSP-100 unit with the transceiver, turn

on the transceiver first, then turn on the DSP-100.

USING QUICK TRANSFER

When connecting with another TS-2000(X), TS-570,

or TS-870S, use the same COM connector baud rate

on each transceiver. If transferring to or from other

KENWOOD transceivers, select 4800 bps and 2 stop

bits. On the TS-2000(X), set the parameter in Menu

No. 56 to 4800 bps.

Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slower.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

COMPUTER CONTROL

By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you can

change the computer into an electronic console from

which you can remotely control functions of the

transceiver. This capability makes remote operation

of your transceiver possible from across the room,

from another room, or when coupled with other

commercially available products and where lawful,

from another city, state, or country via a telephone

connection.

Note:

◆

You can use the front panel controls while using computer

control. Settings done from the front panel are effective

immediately.

◆

After the computer is disconnected or turned off, all values

and settings on the front panel are restored.

SETTING UP

■Equipment Needed

• A PC equipped with an RS-232C serial port.

• One straight cable. This cable must have a 9-

pin D-Sub RS-232C female connector at one

end, and at the other end a 9-pin or a 25-pin D-

Sub RS-232C female connector that mates

with the RS-232C port of your computer.

• Transceiver control application.

To design your programs, consult “APPENDIX”

{page XX} for the necessary information.

■Connections

Connecting the transceiver to the computer is

easy. See the diagram given in “CONNECTING

PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” {page XX}.

Note: Before connecting this transceiver to the computer, switch

OFF the power to the transceiver and the computer.

COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS

In order to control the transceiver by computer, you

must first choose the communication parameters.

1On the computer, configure your transceiver

control application for 8 data bits and no parity.

2On the transceiver, select the appropriate transfer

rate and number of stop bits via Menu No. 56.

• The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit.

Note: To reliably use the 38400 or 57600 bps transfer rates, the

RS-232C port of the computer must support these high-speed

communications parameters.

REPEATER FUNCTION

(K-type ONLY)

This transceiver is capable of receiving signals on

one band and retransmitting them on another band.

For example, a signal received on the sub-receiver is

retransmitted on the main transceiver. Similarly, a

signal received on the main transceiver can be

retransmitted on the sub-receiver’s frequency.

You can use any available frequency on the main

transceiver or sub-receiver to receive and transmit.

However, you cannot retransmit the receiving signals

outside the amateur radio bands. You also must use

a different antenna for transmitting and receiving. For

example, if you receive a VHF signal on the sub-

receiver, you can retransmit it using UHF on the main

transceiver. You cannot retransmit the signal using

VHF of the main transceiver.

Note: For the repeater function to operate, the squelch levels of

the main transceiver and sub-receiver must be adjusted so that no

background noise can be heard.

LOCKED-BAND REPEATER

The transceiver always uses the same band to

receive, and retransmits the received signals on the

other band.

1Select a desired receive frequency on the sub-

receiver.

2Press [MAIN] and select a desired transmit

frequency on the main transceiver.

3Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both

receivers mute.

4Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 61A.

5Select LOCKED, using [+].

•“LOCK A” appears.

Note: You can also reverse the receive and transmit bands, so

that you receive on the main transceiver and transmit on the sub-

receiver’s frequency.

CROSS-BAND REPEATER

The cross-band repeater is unlike the lock-band

repeater in that both bands can be used to receive

signals. When a signal is received on one band, it is

retransmitted on the other band. To activate the

cross-band repeater, select CROSS in Menu No. 61A

in step 5.

Note:

◆

The Repeater function has its own Time-out TImer which is set at

3 minutes. This value cannot be changed.

◆

After activating the Repeater function, you cannot access Menu

Nos. other than 61A and 61B.

HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION

If necessary, you can cause this transceiver to remain

in the transmit mode for 500 ms after signals drop.

Access Menu No. 61B (Repeater TX Hold) and select

“ON”.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL

(K-type ONLY)

If you have a Kenwood TH-D7A handheld transceiver,

you can use it to remotely control the 144 MHz and

430 (440) MHz bands of the TS-2000 transceiver,

using FM mode. You will be controlling one band on

the TS-2000 transceiver while sending DTMF tones

to the other band from the remote control transceiver.

This function is useful, for example, when you want to

control the VHF/ UHF FM repeater function of the

TS-2000 transceiver from a location outside your

home or vehicle.

Note:

◆

To remotely control the TS-2000, you can also use a handheld

transceiver which does not have a remote control function, but

a DTMF function. You must, however, manually send DTMF

tones for control code strings. Skip steps 1 and 3 in

“PREPARATION”, below.

◆

FCC rules permit you to send control codes only on the 430

(440) MHz band.

PREPARATION

Assuming that the 144 MHz band of the TS-2000

transceiver will be controlled.

On the control transceiver:

1Program a 3-digit secret number.

• If you are using a TH-D7A, see “WIRELESS

REMOTE CONTROL” in its instruction manual.

2Select the transmit frequency on the 430

(440) MHz band.

3Enter the Remote Control mode.

On the TS-2000 transceiver:

4Access Menu 61C, and select the same secret

number as you selected in step 1.

5Select the receive frequency on the 430

(440) MHz band of the sub-receiver.

• Mate this frequency with the transmit frequency

on the control transceiver.

6Select the 144 MHz band as the TX band or

Control band for the main transceiver.

7To have the TS-2000 transceiver send a control

acknowledgment to the handheld, access Menu

61D and select “ON”.

• DTMF tones which represent the secret

number will be used as an acknowledgment.

8Access Menu 61E and select “ON”.

• “LOCK A” appears when the TS-2000 enters

Remote Control mode.

CONTROL OPERATION

When in Remote Control mode, the DTMF keys of the

control transceiver will function as shown in the table

below. Each time you press the desired key, the

transceiver will automatically enter transmit mode and

send the corresponding command to the mobile.

Note: If using a transceiver without a remote control function,

manually send “AXXX#YA#” where “XXX” is your 3-digit secret

number and “Y” is a single-digit control command. If you do not add

”A#” to the end, you can skip sending “AXXX#” next time; however,

the mobile may be accidentally controlled by other stations.

To change the transmit/ receive frequency:

([VFO] ➡ [ENTER] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter the necessary

digits) ➡ [ENTER]) or ([VFO] ➡ [UP]/ [DOWN])

To recall a memory channel:

([MR] ➡ [ENTER] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter the necessary

digits) ➡ [ENTER]) or ([MR] ➡ [UP]/ [DOWN])

To change the tone (or CTCSS) frequency:

([TONE SEL] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter 2 digits; ex. [0], [5])

➡ [TONE SEL])

• Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table on page 35.

• First activate the Tone or CTCSS function. You

can select a separate tone frequency for the Tone

and CTCSS functions.

Note: While in Wireless Remote Control mode, you can perform only

the following operations on the TS-2000 transceiver.

•

Transmit

•

Answer Back ON/ OFF

•

Secret Number Change

•

Partial/ Full Reset

1NOSCD 9RM

2NOENOT 0WOL

3NOSSCTC ARETNE

4FFOSCD BLESENOT

5FFOENOT CNORETAEPER

6FFOSSCTC DFFORETAEPER

7LLAC NWOD

8OFV #PU

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

PREPARATION

Although you can use either a TM-D700A, a TH-D7A,

or another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a “Commander”

(an external remote control unit), the following

procedure shows how to set up your TS-2000 as a

“Transporter” at a base station and the TM-D700A as

a “Commander”.

TS-2000 (Transporter) Setup:

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62A.

2Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a

“Commander” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62A.

3Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62B.

4Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a

“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62B.

Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and

“–”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long,

including “–”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be

entered:

•

WD6DJYZ

If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the

maximum length is 6 characters.

•

WD6–DJY–1

You cannot use more than 1 “–” within a callsign.

•

–WD6DJY

You cannot use a “–” as the first callsign character.

•

WD6DJY–19

An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.

5Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky

Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).

6Access Menu No. 62D and select the

communication speed for Sky Command II+.

Select 1200 bps for TM-D700A (9600 bps can be

used only when you use another TS-2000(X) as a

“Commander”).

7Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.

8Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on

the main transceiver and 430 (440) MHz band

frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky

Command operation.

TM-D700A (Commander) Setup:

1Access Menu 4-1 and 4-2 to enter the same

callsign that you entered for TS-2000(X).

2Access Menu 4-3 to select the same CTCSS tone

frequency that you selected for TS-2000(X)

(Transporter).

Note: Refer to Chapter 17, Sky Command II, of the TM-D700A

instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and

CTCSS tone frequency.

SKY COMMAND II +

(K-type ONLY)

The Sky Command II+ allows you to remotely control

the TS-2000(X) transceiver from a seperate location.

Since the TS-2000(X) transceiver has an independent

VHF and UHF sub-receiver in addition to the main

transceiver, the sub-receiver can work as a

“Transporter” without requiring another VHF/UHF

transceiver.

So, if you already have Kenwood’s TH-D7A handheld

or TM-D700A mobile transceiver, you can

immediately start enjoying Sky Command II+ features

to remotely control the HF/ 50 MHz band of your

TS-2000(X).

Or, if you have a friend who has another TS-2000(X),

you can also use his/ her TS-2000(X) as a

“Commander” (a remote unit) to control the HF/ 50

MHz band of your TS-2000(X) at home, using VHF

and UHF bands.

You will use one transceiver as a remote control unit,

called a “Commander”. The VHF/ UHF sub-receiver

in the TS-2000(X) transceiver is called the

“Transporter”. It will function as an interface between

the Commander and the HF/ 50 MHz band of the

TS-2000(X) main transceiver.

This system allows you, for example, to watch for and

hunt DX while washing your car, or to operate the HF

transceiver while relaxing in your car, living room, or

patio, instead of actually operating inside your shack.

Your shack

HF/ 50 MHz

VHF

UHF

TM-D700A/ TH-D7/

TS-2000

ATT PRE-AMP

VOX PROC

SEND

CH1 MIC

FSK

LSB

USB

AT TUNE

POWER HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D

PHONES

CH2

CH3

ANT

REC

FINE

AGC/TONE

REV

CLR

F.LOCK

ENT

MIC

PWR

KEY

DELAY MENU 1MHz

SPLIT

M/V

DOWN UP

TF-SET

A=B

SCAN M>VFO M.IN

M.IN

FILTER

CW TUNE

B.C.

N.R.

A/B

CLEAR

RIT

XIT

RIT/XIT

IF SHIFT SQL

CH 46

010

AF RF

HIGH

DSP SLOPE

LOW

010

+–

VHF freq.

Commander Transporter

Audio Audio

UHF freq.

Audios

Control commands

tResponse

Control commands

tResponse

SKY COMMAND II + DIAGRAM

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

yeKciM noitcnuF

1FFO/NOrewoP

2FFO/NOeviecerycneuqerfFH

3hctiwsedomnoitaludoM

4FFO/NOTIR

5FFO/NOTIX

6raelctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR

7FFO/NOycneuqerf-tilpS

8OFVotyromeMmorfrefsnarT

9hctiwsBOFV/AOFV:edomOFVnI egnahcon:edomllaceRyromeMnI

0FHmorf(eveirtersgnittestnerruC )reviecsnart

BhctiwsedomllaceRyromeM/OFV

CesaercniycneuqerftesffoTIR/TIX

DesaercedycneuqerftesffoTIR/TIX

zHk1/zH01:edomWCro,BSU,BSLnI hctiws hctiwszHk01/zHk1:edomMAroMFnI

NOyrtneycneuqerf:edomOFVnI rebmunlennahc:edomllaceRyromeMnI NOyrtne

Starting Sky Command II+ operation:

After you have completed the following setups, you

can start Sky Command II+ operation. Without

programming these parameters, you cannot perform

Sky Command II+ operation.

On the TS-2000 (Transporter):

1Select the desired HF frequency that you want to

be controlled on the main transceiver.

2Select an open VHF frequency in FM mode for the

main transceiver and another open UHF

frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver.

3Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62E.

4Select T-PORTER (Transporter).

5Press [MENU] to enter the Transporter mode.

On the TM-D700A (Commander):

1Select the same VHF and UHF frequencies that

you selected for the TS-2000 (Transporter)

2Access Menu 4-4 to select COMMANDER.

•“PRESS [0] KEY TO START COMMANDER!!”

appears.

3Press [0] on the DTMF Mic of the TM-D700A to

start the Sky Command II+ operation.

CONTROL OPERATION

After setting up both the TS-2000 (Transporter) and

the TM-D700A (Commander) for Sky Command II+

operation, press Mic [0] on the Commander. While in

Sky Command mode, the Mic keys of the

Commander will function as describled below.

Each time you press a key, the Commander will

automatically enter transmit mode and send the

corresponding control command to the Transporter.

1 “FS” appears when you select 1 kHz step (LSB/ USB/ CW) or

10 kHz step (FM/ AM).

2 After pressing Mic [#], press Mic [0] to [9] to enter a frequency or

memory channel number.

When Mic [0] is pressed, the Commander shows the

current settings of the HF transceiver:

qHF frequency

wVFO: A, VFO: B,

MR: 00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)

eRIT, XIT

rOFF, –9.99 ~ +9.99

tLSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM

ySPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.

SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting.

SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.

u“FS” appears when Mic [ ] is pressed.

Note:

◆

After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.

◆

The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every

10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.

◆

The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the

Transporter is ON.

FHehtFFO/NOhctiwsoT reviecsnart ciMsserP ]1[ .

roycneuqerfehtegnahcoT FHehtnolennahcyromem reviecsnart

ciMsserP ]PU[ /]NWD[ .

FHnanooiduatimsnartoT ycneuqerf ciMdlohdnasserP ]TTP[ ,

ehtotnikaepsneht .enohporcim

FHnanooiduaevieceroT ycneuqerf ciMsserP ]2[ .

dnabFHUehtrotinomoT rednammoCehtno yekFPciMehtsserP rotinoMehtdengissa .noitcnuf

eyr

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER

To use a TH-D7A transceiver as a “Commander” (an

external remote control unit), follow the steps below.

Basically, it is the same as using a TM-D700A as a

“Commander” (described on the previous page).

TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62A.

2Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a

“Commander” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62A.

3Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62B.

4Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a

“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62B.

Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and

“–”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long

including “–”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be

entered:

•

WD6DJYZ

If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the

maximum length is 6 characters.

•

WD6–DJY–1

You cannot use more than 1 “–” within a callsign.

•

–WD6DJY

You cannot use a “–” as the first callsign character.

•

WD6DJY–19

An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.

5Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky

Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).

6Access Menu No. 62D and select the

communication speed for Sky Command II+.

Select 1200 bps for TH-D7A (9600 bps can be

used only when you use another TS-2000 as a

“Commander”).

7Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.

8Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on

the main transceiver and 430 (440) MHz band

frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky

Command operation.

TH-D7A (Commander) Setup:

1Access Menu 4-1 to enter the same callsign that

you entered for the Commander (ex: WD6DJY).

2Access Menu 4-2 to enter the same callsign that

you entered for the Transporter (ex: WD6DJY-1).

3Access Menu 4-3 to select the same CTCSS tone

frequency that you selected for the TS-2000(X)

(Transporter).

FHehthctiwsoT FFO/NOreviecsnart sserP ]REWOP[ .

anooiduatimsnartoT ycneuqerfFH

ehtdlohdnasserP TTP otnikaepsneht,hctiws .enohporcimeht

nanooiduaevieceroT ycneuqerfFH sserP ]XR[ .

dnabFHUehtrotinomoT rednammoCehtno dlohdnasserP ]INOM[ .

4Set the same frequencies that you selected for the

“Transporter” for the VHF and UHF bands.

Note: Refer to Chapter 19, Sky Command II, of the TH-D7A

instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and

CTCSS tone frequency.

CONTROL OPERATION

First, switch the TS-2000 transceiver ON and select

T-PORTER (Transporter) from Menu 62E.

Then, access Menu 4–4 on the TH-D7A and select

“COMMANDER”. “PUSH [0] KEY TO START

COMMANDER!!” appears.

Press [0] on the TH-D7A to start Sky Command

mode.

When in Sky Command mode, the keys of the

TH-D7A (Commander) will function as described

below. Only [LAMP], [MONI], and the VOL control

functions will not change.

Each time you press the desired key, the Commander

will automatically enter transmit mode and send the

corresponding control command to the TS-2000

(Transporter).

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

yeK noitcnuF

gninuT lortnoc rebmunlennahcyromemroycneuqerF egnahc

PU /

NWD egnahctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR

B/A hctiwsBOFV/AOFV:edomOFVnI egnahcon:edomllaceRyromeMnI

REWOP

FFO/NOrewoP

FFO/NOeviecerycneuqerfFH

EDOM

hctiwsedomnoitaludoM

TIR

FFO/NOTIR

TIX

FFO/NOTIX

RLC

raelctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR

TILPS

FFO/NOycneuqerf-tilpS

M➧V

OFVotyromeMmorfrefsnarT

TSAF zHk1/zH01:edomWCro,BSU,BSLnI hctiws hctiwszHk01/zHk1:edomMAroMFnI

CNYS

FHmorf(eveirtersgnittestnerruC )reviecsnart

TNE NOyrtneycneuqerf:edomOFVnI rebmunlennahc:edomllaceRyromeMnI NOyrtne

V/M hctiwsedomllaceRyromeM/OFV

yr u

1 After pressing [ENT], you can use these keys as numeric keys to

enter a frequency or memory channel number.

When [0/ SYNC] is pressed, the Commander shows

the current settings of the HF transceiver:

qHF frequency

wA (VFO A), B (VFO B),

00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)

eRIT, XIT

rOFF, –9.99 ~ +9.99

t“FS” appears when [FAST] is ON.

yLSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM

uSPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.

SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting.

SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.

Note:

◆

On the Transporter, only [LAMP], [MONI], and [MENU] will

function. Pressing any other key will simply cause the

Transporter to generate an error beep.

◆

After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.

◆

The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every

10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.

◆

The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while

Transporter is ON.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

USING ANOTHER TS-2000 AS A COMMANDER

To use another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a

“Commander” (an external remote control unit), follow

the steps below. Basically, it is the same as using a

TM-D700A as a “Commander” (described on pages

83 and 84).

TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62A.

2Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a

“Commander” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62A.

3Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62B.

4Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a

“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62B.

Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and

“–”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long

including “–”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be

entered:

•

WD6DJYZ

If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the

maximum length is 6 characters.

•

WD6–DJY–1

You cannot use more than 1 “–” within a callsign.

•

–WD6DJY

You cannot use a “–” as the first callsign character.

•

WD6DJY–19

An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.

5Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky

Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).

6Access Menu No. 62D and select the

communication speed for Sky Command II+.

• Select 1200 bps or 9600 bps.

7Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.

8Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on

the main transceiver and 430 (440) MHz band

frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky

Command operation.

TS-2000 (Commander) Setup:

1Access Menu No. 62A and 62B to enter the same

callsigns that you entered for the TS-2000

(Transporter).

2Access Menu No. 62C to select the same CTCSS

tone frequency that you selected for the TS-2000

(Transporter).

3Access Menu No. 62D and select the same

communication speed that you selected for the

TS-2000 (Transporter).

4Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.

5Set the same frequencies that you selected for the

lortnoC noitcnuF

NIAM lortnoc gnitarepoehtlortnocotnruT .ycneuqerf

HC/ITLUM lortnoc gnitarepoehtlortnocotnruT .yldiparycneuqerf

]NIAM[ gniviecertnerrucehtrotinomotsserP .ycneuqerf

]BUS[ ehtllaehtezinorcnys-erotsserP retropsnartehtneewtebnoitamrofni .rednammocdna

]+[ /]–[ ehtnwodropuevomotsserP ruetamazHM05/FH(dnabgnitarepo .)sdnaboidar

]M/OFV[ dnaedomOFVelggototsserP .edomllaceRyromeM

]TNE[

ycneuqerfderisedaretneotsserP yromemrodapyekciremungnisu llaceRyromeMnirebmunlennahc .edom

M[ ss

ss ]OFV lennahcyromemehtrefsnartotsserP .OFVotnoitamrofni

]B/A[ .BroAOFVehttcelesotsserP

]TILPS[ NOnoitarepoTILPSelggototsserP .FFOro

]BSU/BSL[ .BSUroBSLtcelesotsserP

]KSF/WC[ ebtonnacKSF.WCtcelesotsserP .detceles

]MA/MF[ .MAroMFtcelesotsserP

]TIR[ /]TIX[ TIXdna/roTIRetavitcaotsserP .noitcnuf

]RAELC[ TIRrofycneuqerftesfforaelcotsserP .TIXdna/ro

]CORP[ rossecorPhceepSehthctiwsotsserP .NOnoitcnuF

].N.A[ noitcnufhctoNotuAetavitcaotsserP .FFOroNO

].C.B[ noitcnuflecnaCtaeBetavitcaotsserP .FFOroNO

].R.N[ ,1noitcudeResioNetavitcaotsserP .FFOronoitcnuf2noitcudeResioN

]CNUF[ ,]TA[ dna1TNAneewtebelggototsserP .dnabzHM05/FHrof2TNA

]CNUF[ ,/7[ ]LEVEL/BN reknalBesioNetavitcaotsserP .FFOroNOnoitcnuf

]CNUF[ ,]REWOP[ .FFOrewopretropsnarTehthctiwS

“Transporter” for the main transceiver and sub-

receiver.

Starting Sky Command ll+ operation:

1On the Transporter, access Menu No. 62E.

2Select T-PORTER (Transporter).

3On the Commander, access Menu No. 62E.

4Select COMMANDER (Commander).

5Press [MAIN] on the Commander to start the

operation.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

These keys and controls are available on the

Commander to control the Transporter.

Note:

◆

You cannot recall memory channels 100 to 299 using [ENT] and

the numeric keys.

To recall memory channels 100 ~ 299, use [+]

or [–].

◆

You can recall only the memory channels that have HF/ 50 MHz

frequencies.

USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER

If you have more than 2 TH-D7A and/or TM-D700A

transceivers, you can use one of the transceivers as

a “Transporter”. This transceiver is connected to the

TS-2000(X) via the RS-232C port, EXT SP jack, and

Mic connector of the base station and the other

TH-D7A or TM-D700A transceiver works as a

“Commander”. With this configuration, you can turn

the TS-2000(X) ON and OFF using the

“Commander”. Refer to the instruction manual of the

TH-D7A or TM-D700A for interfacing the transceiver

to the TS-2000 transceiver.

TS-2000 + TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Transporter) Setup:

1Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a

“Transporter” and connect all the necessary

cables to the TS-2000.

2Select a frequency (HF/ 50 MHz band) on the

main transceiver of the TS-2000.

3On the TS-2000 Press [MENU], then turn the

MULTI/ CH control to access Menu No. 62E.

4Select a “CLIENT”.

5Press [MENU] to complete.

6Start the Transporter mode on the TH-D7A or

TM-D700A.

TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Commander) Setup:

Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a

“Commander”. Refer to the SKY COMMAND II

chapter in the instruction manual to set up the

transceiver as a “Commander”.

You can use a “Commander” as described on pages

84 and 86.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

6Repeat steps 3 to 5 to record a message on

another channel.

Note: Pressing the [POWER] switch cancels recording in

progress and clears the memory channel.

MESSAGE PLAYBACK

You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, or 3

to check or to send. It is also possible to make a

longer message, by consecutively playing back the

messages of more than one channel, linking them

together.

You can even repeatedly send a longer, linked

message by using the Repeat function. To switch this

function ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON

(Default is OFF). Then, select the repeat interval

time in Menu No. 29B (Default is 10 seconds).

Note:

◆

Pressing the [POWER] switch cancels playback in progress.

◆

The settings in Menu No. 29A and No. 29B are shared with

CW Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE

MEMORY” {page 43}.

■Checking Messages

1Select SSB, FM, or AM.

• Use the same mode for transmitting and

receiving.

2If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch

the function OFF.

3Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or

[3/ CH3/REC], depending on which channel

you want to check.

• For example, “s PLAY BACK” and

“AP 1– –” appear while playing back the

message in channel 1.

• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].

4To play back another message in sequence,

press the corresponding key ([1/ CH1/REC],

[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]) while the first

message is being played.

• Up to three channels can be queued.

DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT

(OPTIONAL)

The optional DRU-3A unit allows you to record a

voice message on up to 3 channels. After recording

a message via your transceiver microphone, you can

then send that message.

The maximum recording time for each channel is as

follows:

Channel 1: Approx. 30 seconds

Channel 2: Approx. 15 seconds

Channel 3: Approx. 15 seconds

The DRU-3A is useful in many situations:

• DX chasing or contest operation where repeated

calls are necessary for extended periods of time

• Checking interference complaints with other

equipment (lets you be in two places at one time)

• Checking or adjusting your transmit signal or your

antenna(s) if it’s not convenient to be sitting in

front of your microphone

• Helping a friend adjust his/her antenna or receive

when he/she needs repeated test transmissions.

For information on how to install the DRU-3A unit,

refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 96}.

RECORDING MESSAGES

This section explains how to record a single

message.

1Select SSB, FM, or AM.

• Use the same mode for transmitting and

receiving.

2If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the

function OFF.

3Press [FUNC], [1/ CH1/REC] to record the

message for channel 1.

•“¡|| REC WAIT” and “AP1 –” appear.

• To exit the Record Standby mode and quit

recording your message, press [CLR].

4Press and hold [1/ CH1/REC], then begin

speaking into your microphone.

• Three channels are available for recording

messages. Press a different channel key,

[2/ CH2/REC] or [3/ CH3/REC] in place of

[1/ CH1/REC], in step 3, to record the message

on a different channel.

5Release the key pressed in step 4 when you have

finished recording your message.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

■Sending Messages

1Select SSB, FM, or AM.

• Use the same mode for transmitting and

receiving.

2Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch VOX ON or

OFF.

• If you switched VOX ON, skip step 3.

3Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].

4Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or

[3/ CH3/REC], depending on which channel

you want to use.

• For example, “s PLAY BACK” and

“AP 1– –” appear while playing back the

message in channel 1.

• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].

5To play back another message in sequence,

press the corresponding key ([1/ CH1/REC],

[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]) while the first

message is being played.

• Up to 3 channels can be queued.

6If you pressed [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3,

press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].

■Erasing a Recorded Message

1Press [FUNC] then [1/ CH1/REC] or

[2/ CH2/REC] or [3/ CH3/REC] to select the

channel you want to erase the message.

•“¡|| REC WAIT” and “APn –” appear.

Note: “n” represents the channel number.

2To erase the recorded message, press and

hold the same key as in step 1 ([1/ CH1/REC],

[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]), and press

[CLR] at the same time.

• A beep sounds and the message is erased.

■Changing Inter-message Interval Time

For repetitive message playback, you can change

the interval between each series of messages.

Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the

range of 0 to 60 seconds.

■Changing Playback Volume

Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not

change the volume for playback. To change the

volume, access Menu No. 14 to select the

playback volume level from OFF and 1 to 9.

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL)

Install the optional VS-3 unit to use this function.

Each time you change the transceiver mode such as

VFO A/B or Memory Recall, the transceiver

automatically announces the new mode. In addition,

you can program the front panel [PF] key so that

pressing it makes the transceiver announce the

displayed information. If you have the optional

MC-47 microphone, you can program one of the Mic

[PF] keys for this function as well.

For an explanation on how to install the VS-3 unit,

refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 96}.

The table below indicates what the transceiver

automatically announces when it changes the

settings.

For the [PF] key, the transceiver will announce

different information, depending on whether Voice 1

or Voice 2 is selected.

Voice 1:

• VFO or memory channel frequencies are

announced beginning with the 10 MHz digit and

continuing through to the 10 Hz digit. If the

memory channel has no data stored, “open” is

announced. For the MHz decimal point, “point” is

announced. For the kHz decimal point, a short

pause (200 ms) is made. A 200 ms pause is also

made between the channel number and the

frequency.

desserPyeK noitarepO tnemecnuonnA

]B/A[ AOFV ycneuqerf+OFV

BOFV

]LLAC[ lennahcllaCycneuqerf+llaC

]M/OFV[ roOFV yromeM llaceR

ycneuqerf+OFV ro .oNyromeM+RM ycneuqerf+

]UNEM[ .oNuneM noitceles

+.oN+uneM /rebmundetceleS retemarap

]TNE[ ycneuqerF yrtne retnE

HC/ITLUM lortnoc

.oNuneM segnahc

+.oN+uneM /rebmundetceleS retemarap

yromeM .oNlennahc segnahc

yromeM+RM +.oNlennahc ycneuqerf

yekciremuN yrtne gniretnE srebmun rebmunyrevE deretne

]•[ ehtgniruD ycneuqrf yrtne ztrehageM

• Menu numbers and their settings are announced

with a short pause (200 ms) between the menu

number and the setting.

Note: If operating a key or a control changes the contents of the

display while an announcement is in progress, the announcement

is interrupted.

Voice 2:

• The S-meter readings at the time you pressed the

key, are announced, for example, “S5” or “20dB”.

The table below shows the available announcement

when the [PF] (Voice2) is pressed.

1Assign Voice 1 or Voice 2 to the front panel [PF]

key by accessing Menu No. 51A. Or, if you are

using the optional MC-47 microphone, assign one

of the Mic [PF] keys to either Voice 1 or Voice 2.

For programming Mic [PF] keys, refer to

“PROGRAM FUNCTION KEYS” {page 77}.

2Press the [PF] key that you programmed.

• An announcement is made based on the Voice

1 or Voice 2 selection.

• To interrupt the announcement, press the [PF]

key again.

NIAM BUS

reteM-S leveL -ecnuonnA tnem reteM-S leveL -ecnuonnA tnem

3-11S11S

42S22S

6-53S33S

74S44S

9-85S55S

016S66S

21-117S77S

318S88S

51-419S99S

81-61Bd0101Bd01

02-91Bd0211Bd02

22-12Bd0321Bd03

52-32Bd0431Bd04

82-62Bd0541Bd05

03-92Bd0651Bd06

12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

MICROPROCESSOR RESET

If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning,

resetting the microprocessor default settings may

resolve the problem. There are 2 levels of resetting

the microprocessor of the TS-2000(X): partial reset

and full reset.

INITIAL SETTINGS

For each VFO, the factory defaults for the operating

frequency and mode are as follows:

• MAIN VFO A: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB

• MAIN VFO B: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB

• SUB VFO: 144.000.00 MHz/ FM

The Memory channels and Quick memory channels

have no data stored.

PARTIAL RESET

Perform a Partial Reset if a key or control does not

function according to the instructions in this manual.

The following data is NOT erased by performing a

Partial Reset.

• Memory channel data

• Menu settings

• Antenna tuner preset data

• ANT 1/ANT 2 data.

Reset the transceiver by pressing [A/B]+ POWER

ON.

• “HELLO” appears on the display.

FULL RESET

Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data

in all the memory channels. In addition, this function

resets all the settings that you customized, to the

factory defaults (i.e.- menu settings, antenna tuner

preset data, etc.).

Reset the transceiver by pressing [A=B]+ POWER

ON.

A confirmation message appears when performing

the Full Reset. Press the [A=B] key to proceed.

Otherwise, press any other key to cancel the Full

Reset and return to normal operation.

When you perform the full reset:

• “HELLO” appears on the display.

• All frequencies, modes, memory data and AT

preset data are set to the factory default values

(refer to “INITIAL SETTINGS”, above).

COMPUTER

The COM connector allows you to directly connect a computer or dumb terminal by using an RS-232C cable

terminated with a female 9-pin connector.

No external hardware interface is required between your computer and the transceiver. See “APPENDIX” on

page XX for information related to this connector.

COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER

When transferring data to or from another TS-2000, TS-570, or TS-870S, directly connect the two transceivers

using the COM connectors.

When transferring data to other KENWOOD transceivers, use the optional IF-232C interface unit. Connect the

IF-232C to the ACC 1 connector located on the compatible transceiver. 6-pin DIN plugs (E07-0654-XX) are

available as options. Contact your dealer or a KENWOOD Service Center.

CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Pin Name

GND

TXD

RXD

CTS

RTS

No.

ACC 1

COM connector

Personal computer/

dumb terminal

RS-232C

serial port

TS-2000

Straight cable

TS-2000 TS-2000/870S

TS-2000 Cross-wired cable

Cross-wired cable

See IF-232C manual.

IF-232C

Straight cable

COM Connector

cable

TS-450S/690S/850S/950SDX

ANT

DIN(6P)

RS-232C(25P)

DIN(6P)

Rear panel view on

TS-450S/690S/850S/

950SDX

ACC 1

15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

RTTY EQUIPMENT

Use the ACC 2 connector to connect to the RTTY equipment. Connect the RTTY key output line to pin 2 of the

ACC 2 connector. Connect the demodulation input line of the RTTY equipment to pin 3 of the ACC 2 connector.

Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment. Keep as wide a separation as possible

between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment as practical to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.

LINEAR AMPLIFIER

Connect an external transmit power amplifier to the REMOTE connector. Before using the external amplifier,

switch ON the linear amplifier control relay via Menu No. XX.

The TX/RX relay response time is 10 ms when you have selected CW Full Break-in and 25 ms when you have

selected CW Semi Break-in.

Note: The TX/RX control method differs, depending on external amplifier models. Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control

terminal is grounded. For those amplifiers, connect pin 2 of the REMOTE connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect pin 4

of the connector to the control terminal of the amplifier.

ANTENNA TUNER

Use the ANT 1 and AT connectors to connect an external antenna tuner. If you connect the external tuner to the

ANT 2 connector, the external tuner will not function.

Note: While using an external antenna tuner with the TS-570S, you cannot use the 6 m band to transmit. Connect your 6 m band antenna

to the ANT 2 connector.

Speaker output

Common terminal

Standby; when grounded, the

transceiver enters TX mode.

When connected with the common

terminal, the amplifier enters TX mode.

When connected with the common

terminal, the amplifier enters RX mode.

ALC input from amplifier

Approx. +12 V DC is output when in

TX mode (10 mA max.).

No. Function

REMOTE connector

MCP

power

supply

TS-2000 ACC 2

MCP

Personal computer/

dumb terminal

TS-2000

AC LINE

RF OUTPUT

Linear

amplifier

Control relay

GND

REMOTE Connector

(Rear panel view)

TS-2000

External antenna tuner

RTK

ANO

GND

PSQ

SMET

GND

PKS

PKD

GND

Name

Pin No.

Not connected

RTTY key input

AF output from receiver

• Connect to TNC or MCP receive data pin for digital operation.

• AF output level is independent of AF control setting.

• AF output level can be changed via Menu No. 34.

• Output impedance: 4.7 kΩ

Shield for pin 3

Squelch control

• Connect to TNC or MCP squelch control pin for digital operation.

• Prevents the TNC from transmitting while the receiver squelch is open.

• Squelch open: Low impedance

• Squelch closed: High impedance

S-meter output

Not connected

Chassis ground

Transceiver PTT line control

• Connect to TNC or MCP transmit/receive switching pin for digital operation.

• Microphone audio input is muted when the transceiver is switched to the transmit mode.

Not connected

Microphone audio input

• Connect to TNC or MCP transmit data pin for digital operation.

Shield for pin 11

PTT control (in parallel with MIC jack) for connecting a footswitch or other external controller

Function

15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

MCP AND TNC

Use the ACC 2 connector to connect the input/output lines from a Terminal Node Controller (TNC) for Packet

operation, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) for operation on Packet, PacTOR, AMTOR, G-TORTM,

PSK31, or FAX, or from a Clover interface. Also use the ACC 2 connector to connect SSTV and phone patch

equipment.

• Connect the TNC or MCP to the ACC 2 connector using a cable equipped with a 13-pin DIN plug.

• Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb terminal requires an RS-232C cable.

Note:

◆

Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the TNC or MCP. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the

transceiver and the computer as practical to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.

◆

The output voltage of Pin No. 6 (SMET) is not 0 V even when no signal is present. In addition, the output voltage differs between FM

(approx. 2.8 ~ 3.8 V) and other modes (approx. 0.5 ~ 3.8 V). When connecting this pin to peripheral equipment such as a personal

computer, the input impedance of that equipment must be higher than 1 M

Ω

. If you connect to equipment having a lower impedance, the

S-meter will not give accurate readings.

TNC/MCP TS-2000 PS-53

ACC 2 Connector

(Rear panel view)

Personal computer

dumb terminal 13

9101112

56 78

12 34

Black

Red

You will require a philips screw driver when installing

the optional units.

REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE

When installing the optional DRU-3A or VS-3 unit,

remove the bottom case first.

1Remove the 10 screws.

2Lift off the bottom case.

DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT

CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC

POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.

1Remove the bottom case (10 screws).

2Locate the DRU-3A connector.

3Remove the orange film on the connector and

peel off the paper on the cushion attached to the

PC board of the transceiver.

4Plug the DRU-3A into the DRU-3A connector of

the PC baord.

5Press the top of DRU-3A to fix to the cushion

firmly.

6Replace the bottom case (10 screws).

INSTALLING OPTIONS

VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT

CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC

POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.

1Remove the bottom case (10 screws).

2Locate the VS-3 connector.

3Hold the VS-3 unit with the component side facing

up, and insert the VS-3 connector into the VS-3

jack.

4Replace the bottom case (10 screws).

Note: After the installation, you can adjust the VS-3 playback

volume by selecting Menu No. 14.

DRU-3A

Cushion

14 INSTALLING OPTIONS

RC-2000 REMOTE PANELMB-430 MOBILE BRACKET

CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC

POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.

1Remove the bottom case (10 screws).

2Locate VS-3 connector.

3Hold the VS-3 unit with the component side facing

up, and insert the VS-3 connector into the VS-3

connector.

4Replace the bottom case (10 screws).

Note: After the installation, you can adjust the VS-3 playback

volume, selecting Menu No. 14.

MAINTENANCE

SERVICE NOTE

Dear YL/OM,

If you desire to correspond on a technical or

operational problem, please make your note short,

complete, and to the point. Help us help you by

providing the followings:

1Model and serial number of equipment.

2Question or problem you are having.

3Other equipment in your station pertaining to the

problem.

4Meter readings.

5Other related information (Menu setup, mode,

frequency, button sequence to induce malfunction,

etc.).

CAUTION: DO NOT PACK THE EQUIPMENT IN CRUSHED

NEWSPAPERS FOR SHIPMENT! EXTENSIVE DAMAGE MAY

RESULT DURING ROUGH HANDLING OR SHIPPING.

Note:

◆

Record the date of purchase, serial number and dealer from

whom the transceiver was purchased.

◆

For your own information, retain a written record of any

maintenance performed on the transceiver.

◆

When claiming warranty service, please include a photocopy

of the bill of sale, or other proof-of-purchase showing the date

of sale.

CLEANING

The buttons, controls and case of the transceiver are

likely to become soiled after extended use. Remove

the controls from the transceiver and clean them with

a neutral detergent and warm water. Use a neutral

detergent (no strong chemicals) and a damp cloth to

clean the case.

LITHIUM BATTERY

This transceiver uses an EEPROM to store memory

channel data, menu configurations and all necessary

operation parameters. So, you never have to worry

about replacing batteries to operate the transceiver.

However, the transceiver’s built-in TNC requires a

lithium battery (CR-2032) to store the TNC data.

Battery lifetime varies, but under normal operating

conditions, it should last for approximately 5 years. If

you find that the TNC no longer stores the TNC

parameters, contact an authorized KENWOOD

service center for replacing the lithium battery.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Your transceiver has been factory aligned and tested

to specification before shipment. Under normal

circumstances, the transceiver will operate in

accordance with these operating instructions. All

adjustable trimmers, coils and resistors in the

transceiver were preset at the factory. They should

only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is

familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary

test equipment. Attempting service or alignment

without factory authorization can void the transceiver

warranty.

When operated properly, the transceiver will provide

years of service and enjoyment without requiring

further realignment. The information in this section

gives some general service procedures requiring little

or no test equipment.

SERVICE

If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to your

dealer or service center for repair, pack the

transceiver in its original box and packing material.

Include a full description of the problems

experienced. Include both your telephone number

and fax number (if available) along with your name

and address in case the service technician needs to

call for further explanation while investigating your

problem. Don’t return accessory items unless you

feel they are directly related to the service problem.

You may return your transceiver for service to the

authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you

purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service

center. A copy of the service report will be returned

with the transceiver. Please do not send

subassemblies or printed circuit boards. Send the

complete transceiver.

Tag all returned items with your name and call sign

for identification. Please mention the model and

serial number of the transceiver in any

communication regarding the problem.

1Switch ON the DC power supply.

2Inspect the power cable. Confirm

polarities are correct.

Red: positive (+); Black: negative (–)

3Confirm the connections to the DC

power supply are secure.

4Look for the cause of the blown fuse.

After inspecting and correcting any

problems, install a new fuse of the

specified rating.

1Correct the input voltage or use a 12

to 16 V battery.

2Review “MICROPROCESSOR

RESET”. After understanding what

data will be lost, do a Partial Reset.

If the problem remains, do a Full

Reset.

Have a new battery installed by your

dealer or at a KENWOOD Service

Center.

1Review “WRITING CONVENTIONS

FOLLOWED”.

2Press [F.LOCK] to switch OFF

function.

3Review “MICROPROCESSOR

RESET”. After understanding what

data will be lost, do a Partial Reset.

If the problem remains, do a Full

Reset.

4Stop operating the Tuning control,

then press the appropriate buttons.

Press [F.LOCK] to switch OFF function.

1Change Menu No. 32 to OFF.

2Turn the DSP SLOPE (LOW) control

counterclockwise and the DSP

SLOPE (HIGH) control clockwise.

3Press [N.R.] to switch OFF function.

4Press [B.C.] to switch OFF function.

16 MAINTENANCE

TROUBLESHOOTING

The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions. These types of

difficulties are usually caused by improper hook-up, accidental incorrect control settings, or operator error due to

incomplete programming. These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure. Please review this table, and

the appropriate section(s) of this instruction manual, before assuming your transceiver is defective.

Note:

◆

Due to frequency relationships of some circuits in this transceiver, beat tones may be heard on the following frequencies: 10.000 MHz,

20.000 MHz and 30.000 MHz. This is not a fault.

◆

Placing a powered handy transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in this transceiver.

The transceiver will

not power up after

connecting a

13.8 V DC power

supply and pressing

[POWER]. Nothing

appears on the

display, and no

receiver noise is

heard.

After switching ON the

power, the transceiver

does not function

normally. For

example, no digits or

incorrect digits appear

on the display.

After switching ON the

transceiver,

“14.000.00 MHz USB”

appears and all data

is lost; without doing

Full Reset.

The transceiver does

not respond correctly

after pressing button

or key combinations,

or turning controls per

instructions in this

manual.

Page

Ref.

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

1DC power supply is OFF.

2Faulty power cable

3The power cable is not connected

securely.

4Power cable fuse is open.

1The input voltage is outside 13.8 V

DC ±15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).

2The microprocessor has

malfunctioned.

The backup lithium battery voltage is

too low.

1Procedures are not being followed

precisely.

2The Frequency Lock function is

ON.

3The microprocessor and its

memory need resetting.

4The buttons on the transceiver are

unavailable while operating the

Tuning control.

The Frequency Lock function is ON.

1The filter for digital operation is

selected.

2The DSP SLOPE (LOW) control or

DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control was

incorrectly set.

3Noise Reduction 1 or 2 is ON.

4Beat Cancel is ON.

The frequency

cannot be changed.

SSB audio quality is

very poor; the high

or low audio

frequencies are

absent.

100

16 MAINTENANCE

1The SQL control is fully clockwise.

2The Attenuator function is ON.

3 [SEND] was pressed, and the

transceiver is now in transmit

mode.

4Mic [PTT] is pressed.

5The receive bandwidth was

incorrectly set.

6The wrong antenna connector

(ANT 1/ANT 2) was selected.

7The receive preamplifier is OFF.

The RF control was set too low.

The wrong modulation mode was

selected.

1The SQL control was not set

correctly.

2Less than two memory channels

were unlocked.

3Less than two memory channels

were programmed.

With Group Scan selected, the

channel you want to scan is in a

different group.

The start and end frequencies are

identical.

The impedance of the coaxial cable

and antenna was not matched.

• Tuning does not successfully finish

depending on conditions although

the SWR meter indicates smaller

than 3:1.

The SWR of the antenna system is too

high.

1The microphone plug was not

inserted completely into the MIC

connector.

2The Transmit Inhibit function is ON.

3CW or FSK was selected instead of

a voice mode.

4The filter for digital operation was

selected.

5The wrong antenna connector

(ANT 1/ANT 2) was selected.

No signals are

received or receive

sensitivity seems

poor.

No signals are

received or receive

sensitivity seems

poor; S-meter is

reading full scale.

Received signals are

totally unintelligible.

Memory Scan will not

start scanning.

Memory Scan will not

scan one of the

stored channels; the

desired channel is

NOT locked out.

Program Scan will

not start scanning.

Tuning does not

finish successfully.

The internal tuner is

bypassed

immediately after

tuning is started.

You cannot transmit

even though you

press Mic [PTT] or

transmissions result

in no contacts.

1Turn the SQL control

counterclockwise.

2Press [ATT] to switch OFF function.

3Press [SEND] to return to receive

mode.

4Release Mic [PTT].

5Review sections “IF FILTER” and

“CHANGING RECEIVE

BANDWIDTH”, and set the controls

accordingly.

6Press [ANT] to select the other

antenna connector.

7Press [PRE-AMP] to switch ON

function.

Turn the RF control fully clockwise.

Press [LSB/USB], [CW/FSK], or

[FM/AM] to select the correct

modulation mode.

1Adjust the SQL control to just

eliminate background noise.

2Unlock at least two memory

channels.

3Store data in at least two memory

channels.

Select the group that contains the

memory channel you want to scan.

Store different start and end

frequencies.

Adjust the antenna system to lower the

SWR.

Adjust the antenna system to lower the

SWR.

1Turn OFF the power, ensure the MIC

connector has no foreign objects in

it, then plug in the connector.

Secure the connector with the

locking ring.

2Change Menu No. 38 to OFF.

3Press [LSB/USB] or [FM/AM] to

select a voice mode.

4Change Menu No. 32 to OFF.

5Press [ANT] to select the other

antenna connector.

XX,,XX

101

16 MAINTENANCE

1Check the antenna connection.

Correct as necessary.

2Reduce the SWR of the antenna

system.

3Correct the input voltage or use a

12 to 16V battery.

4Use the provided or an optional DC

power cable.

1When in SSB or AM mode,

increase the microphone gain.

2Check antenna connections.

Confirm that the antenna tuner is

reporting a low SWR.

Increase the gain via Menu No. 16.

1Change Menu No. 39 to ON.

2Inspect the REMOTE connector

wiring and correct as necessary.

1Review “FM REPEATER

OPERATION” and select the

correct frequency and type of

subtone.

2You must transmit on the

repeater’s input frequency and

receive on the repeater’s output

frequency. Refer to “FM

REPEATER OPERATION”.

1Re-check all connections using this

manual, your TNC/MCP manual,

and your computer hardware

manual as references.

2Confirm that the RIT and XIT

functions are switched OFF.

Confirm that you are NOT

operating split frequency.

3Adjust TX and RX levels using

Menu Nos. 33 and 34, and level

controls on your TNC/MCP.

4Reorient/relocate your antenna or

increase your antenna gain.

5Set the TNC/MCP TX delay time to

more than 300 ms.

1Check the cable and cable

connections.

2Use the same parameters in the

terminal program and the

transceiver. Refer to

“COMMUNICATION

PARAMETERS”.

3Disconnect the computer from the

transceiver, and run a utility

program to test the computer serial

port.

1The antenna was not connected

correctly.

2The impedances of the antenna

and transceiver are not properly

matched.

3The input voltage is outside 13.8 V

DC ±15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).

4An inappropriate DC power cable is

being used.

1The microphone gain was set too

low.

2Poor antenna system connections

are causing high SWR.

The VOX gain was set too low.

1The linear amplifier control relay is

OFF.

2The REMOTE connector wiring is

wrong or faulty.

1The repeater requires a subtone

frequency for access.

2You are not operating split

frequency.

1Physical connections between the

transceiver, computer, and TNC or

MCP are incorrect, or software

settings in the TNC or MCP are

wrong.

2Different transmit and receive

frequencies are being used.

3The levels between the transceiver

and the TNC/MCP are incorrect.

4Your transmitted signal or the

incoming receive signal is too

weak.

5The TX delay time parameter in

your TNC/MCP was incorrectly set.

1Problem with the RS-232C cable

that connects the computer to the

transceiver.

2Communication parameters set in

your terminal program do not match

transceiver parameters.

3The serial port on your computer is

not functioning correctly.

Attempting to

transmit results in the

“HELLO” message

appearing and the

receive mode being

restored.

The transceiver has

low transmit power.

VOX does not

operate.

Linear amplifier does

not operate.

You cannot access

and use 10 meter

band repeaters.

Digital operation

results in few or no

connects or contacts

with other stations.

Attempts at

controlling the

transceiver by

computer have failed.

XX,XX,

JVC KENWOOD 31201110 HF/VHF/UHF All-mode Multi-band Transceiver User Manual 0 Front page

JVC KENWOOD Corporation HF/VHF/UHF All-mode Multi-band Transceiver 0 Front page

Users Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation